Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 224

Operator’s Manual

Alchemist Ph.C-HD
Motion Compensated Conversion Platform

snellgroup.com
Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Contents

Contents
1. Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.1 Explanation of Safety Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2 Power cable supplied for the USA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.3 For products with more than one power supply inlet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.4 Handling Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.5 Safety Standard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.6 EMC Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.7 EMC Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.8 EMC Performance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.9 Coaxial Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.10 D-type Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

2. Information and Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11


2.1 About this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
2.2 Packing List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
2.3 Software Version Amendments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
2.4 Manufacturers Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
2.5 Important Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

3. Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.1.1 Front Panel View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.1.2 Rear Panel View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.3 Technical Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

4. Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.1 Unpacking the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.2 Removing the Transit Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.3 Connecting Power to the Alchemist Ph.C-HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4.3.1 Power Inlets and Power Supply Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4.3.2 Power Supply LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4.3.3 Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4.3.4 Supply Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.4 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.5 Handling Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.6 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.6.1 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.6.2 Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4.6.3 Communication Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4.7 Headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

5. Operation Using the Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31


5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5.2 Main Toolbar Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5.3 Warnings and Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5.4 Panel Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5.5 Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
5.6 Selecting Parameters and Making Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
5.7 Selecting Specific Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
5.8 Video Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
5.8.1 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
5.8.2 Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
5.8.3 Aspect Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5.8.4 Proc Amp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
5.8.5 Output A and Output B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
5.8.6 Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
5.8.7 Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 1 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Contents

5.9 Audio Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61


5.9.1 Audio Menu Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
5.9.2 Audio Display Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
5.9.3 Audio Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
5.9.4 Dolby Decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
5.9.5 Dolby Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
5.9.6 Audio Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
5.9.7 External Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
5.9.8 System Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
5.10 Timecode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
5.10.1 Timecode Display Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
5.10.2 Timecode Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
5.10.3 Timecode Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
5.10.4 Timecode Control Warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
5.11 FilmTools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
5.11.1 Enabling FilmTools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
5.11.2 FimTools Display Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
5.11.3 FilmTools Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
5.11.4 FilmTools Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
5.11.5 FilmTools Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
5.11.6 FilmTools Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
5.12 VANC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
5.12.1 VANC Display Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
5.12.2 VANC Menu Hierarchy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
5.12.3 VANC Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
5.13 Closed Captions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
5.13.1 C-Captions Display Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
5.13.2 Closed Caption Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
5.13.3 Closed Captions Output Enabled/Disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5.14 System Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
5.14.1 System Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
5.14.2 Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
5.14.3 Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
5.14.4 RollCall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
5.14.5 Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
5.14.6 SNMP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
5.14.7 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
5.14.8 Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
5.14.9 Debug. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
5.14.10 Tools (Timecode Overlays) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
5.14.11 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
5.14.12 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Appendix A. Noise Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121


A.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
A.2 Noise Reducer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
A.3 Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
A.3.1 Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
A.3.2 Advanced Setup and Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Appendix B. Timecode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124


B.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
B.2 Key Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
B.3 Control Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
B.3.1 Input Timecode Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
B.3.2 Output Timecode Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
B.3.3 Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
B.4 Timecode Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
B.4.1 Input Timecode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
B.4.2 Timecode Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 2 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Contents

B.4.3 Input Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127


B.4.4 Output A Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
B.4.5 Output B Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
B.4.6 Prerun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
B.4.7 Output A Timecode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
B.4.8 Output B Timecode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
B.4.9 E-E Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
B.4.10 Manual Trigger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
B.5 Timecode Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
B.5.1 Timecode Modes at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
B.5.2 Synchro Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
B.5.3 Synchro Prerun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
B.5.4 Synchro Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
B.5.5 E-E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
B.5.6 E-E Regen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
B.5.7 Freerun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
B.5.8 Trigger Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
B.5.9 Timecode Control Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
B.5.10 Operational Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
B.6 Questions & Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Appendix C. RGB Legalizer and Luma Clipper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141


C.1 RGB Legalizer Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
C.2 RGB Legalizer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
C.3 Luma Clipper Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
C.4 Luma Clipper Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Appendix D. FilmTools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144


D.1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
D.2 FilmTools Control and Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
D.2.1 Enabling FilmTools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
D.2.2 FilmTools Input Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
D.2.3 FilmTools Output Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
D.2.4 FimTools Control Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
D.2.5 FilmTools Detection Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
D.3 Operational Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
D.3.1 Operational Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
D.3.2 Operational Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
D.3.3 Operational Example 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
D.3.4 See “Understanding 2:3 Datum Cadence” on page 165.Operational Example
4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
D.4 Conversion Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
D.5 Understanding Datum TC Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
D.5.1 TC Datum with ‘On Valid TC’. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
D.5.2 2:3 TC Datum with ‘At Datum’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
D.6 Understanding 2:3 Datum Cadence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
D.7 Genlock & FilmTools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
D.8 Questions & Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
D.9 FilmTools Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Appendix E. Dolby E Authoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171


E.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
E.1.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
E.2 Dolby® E Control Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
E.3 Dolby Metadata. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
E.3.1 Audio Production Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
E.3.2 Bitstream Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
E.3.3 Center Mix Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
E.3.4 Channel Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
E.3.5 Dialogue Norm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 3 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Contents

E.3.6 DC Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173


E.3.7 LFE Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
E.3.8 LFE Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
E.3.9 Lowpass Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
E.3.10 Line Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
E.3.11 LoRo Center Downmix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
E.3.12 LoRo Surround Downmix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
E.3.13 LtRt Center Downmix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
E.3.14 LtRt Surround Downmix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
E.3.15 Preferred Stereo Downmix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
E.3.16 Program Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
E.3.17 RF Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
E.3.18 Surr 3dB Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
E.3.19 Surround Ex Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
E.3.20 Surround Mix Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
E.3.21 Surround Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
E.3.22 Surround Phase Shift. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
E.4 Operational Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
E.4.1 Operational Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
E.4.2 Operational Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
E.4.3 Operational Example 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
E.4.4 Operational Example 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
E.5 Dolby Metadata and Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
E.6 Metadata Parameter ‘Default’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
E.7 Which Metadata Parameters Are User Configurable? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
E.7.1 Dolby®E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
E.7.2 Dolby®D (AC3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
E.8 Metadata Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
E.8.1 Using Metadata Snapshots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
E.9 Audio Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
E.10 Configuring Dolby®E Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
E.11 Calculating Dolby®E Audio Delay Transcoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
E.12 BLITS Test Generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
E.13 Questions & Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
E.14 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Appendix F. SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192


F.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
F.2 How SNMP Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
F.3 MIB Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
F.4 Accessing a Control Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
F.5 SNMP Notification/Trap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
F.6 SNMP Community Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
F.7 SNMP Menu Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
F.8 SNMP Control Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Appendix G. Closed Caption CEA608/708 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200


G.1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
G.1.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
G.1.2 What is CEA608? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
G.1.3 What is CEA708? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
G.2 CEA608/708 Control Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
G.2.1 C-Captions Display Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
G.2.2 Closed Caption Menu Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
G.2.3 Closed Caption Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
G.2.4 Closed Captions Output Enabled/Disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
G.3 Questions & Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 4 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Contents

Appendix H. Latency Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206


H.1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
H.2 Tables Explained . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Appendix I. RollTrack Audio Delay Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Appendix J. Product Support Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222


J.1 Basic Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
J.2 Basic Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
J.3 Basic Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
J.4 Product Support Request Form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 5 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Safety Information

1. Safety Information

1.1 Explanation of Safety Symbols

Explanation of Safety Symbols GB Erklärung der Sicherheitssymbole D


This symbol refers the user to important information contained in Dieses Symbol weist den Benutzer auf wichtige Informationen
! the accompanying literature. Refer to manual. ! hin, die in der begleitenden Dokumentation enthalten sind.

This symbol indicates that hazardous voltages are present inside. Dieses Symbol zeigt an, dass gefährliche Spannung vorhanden ist.
No user serviceable parts inside. Es befinden sich keine vom Benutzer zu wartenden Teile im Geräteinneren.
This unit should only be serviced by trained personnel. Dieses Gerät sollte nur von geschultem Personal gewartet werden

Safety Warnings Sicherheits-Warnhinweise


Die angeführten Service-/Reparatur-Anweisungen sind
Servicing instructions where given, are for use by ausschließlich von qualifiziertem Service-Personal
CAUTION ! ACHTUNG
! qualified service personnel only.
To reduce risk of electric shock do not perform any Gefahr von Elektroschocks.
auszuführen. Um das Risiko eines lektroschocks zu
reduzieren, führen Sie ausschließlich die im
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK Abdeckungen nicht entfernen
DO NOT REMOVE COVERS servicing other than that contained in the operating Keine vom Benutzer zu wartende Teile Benutzerhandbuch eschriebenen Anweisungen aus,
NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED instructions unless you are qualified to do so. Wenden Sie sich ausschließlich
an qualifiziertes Personal es sei denn, Sie haben die entsprechende Qualifikation.
PERSONNEL ONLY
Refer all servicing to qualified personnel. Wenden Sie sich in allen Service-Fragen an qualifiziertes Personal.

· To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not expose this appliance · Um das Risiko eines Elektroschocks zu reduzieren, setzen Sie das
to rain or moisture. Gerät weder Regen noch Feuchtigkeit aus.
· Always ensure that the unit is properly earthed and power connections · Stellen Sie immer sicher, dass das Gerät ordnungsgemäß geerdet
correctly made. und verkabelt ist.
· This equipment must be supplied from a power system providing a · Dieses Equipment muss an eine Netzsteckdose mit Schutzleiter
PROTECTIVE EARTH connection and having a neutral connection angeschlossen werden und einen zuverlässig identifizierbaren Nullleiter haben.
which can be reliably identified.
· Die Netzsteckdose sollte nahe beim Gerät und einfach zugänglich sein.
· The power outlet supplying power to the unit should be close to the
unit and easily accessible
Netzanschluss in anderen Ländern als der USA
Power connection in countries other than the USA Das Equipment wird im Normalfall mit einem Netzkabel mit Standard IEC
The equipment is normally shipped with a power cable with a standard IEC Anschlussbuchse und einem Standard IEC Anschlussstecker geliefert.
moulded free socket on one end and a standard IEC moulded plug on the other. Sollten Sie den angeschweißten Stecker auswechseln müssen, entsorgen
If you are required to remove the moulded mains supply plug, dispose of the Sie diesen bitte umgehend. Die farbliche Belegung des Netzkabels ist wie folgt:
plug immediately in a safe manner. E=
Schutzleiter
E=
Schutzleiter

The colour code for the lead is as follows: E E GRÜN GELB E = Schutzleiter L= N= N= L=

GREEN/YELLOW lead connected to E BLAU N = Nulleiter Phase Nulleiter Nulleiter Phase

(Protective Earth Conductor)


L N N L BRAUN L = P = Phase
BLUE lead connected to N (Neutral Conductor)
BROWN lead connected to L (Live Conductor)
Achtung: Wenn das Gerät zwei Anschlussbuchsen hat, stellen
Caution If the unit has two mains supply inputs ensure that both power
! Sie bitte sicher, dass beide Netzkabel mit der selben Phase in die
! cords are plugged into mains outlets operating from the same phase. Netzsteckdose gesteckt werden.

Légende : F Explicación de los Símbolos de Seguridad ESP


Ce symbole indique qu'il faut prêter attention et se référer Éste símbolo refiere al usuario información importante contenida
! au manuel. ! en la literatura incluida. Referirse al manual.

Ce symbole indique qu'il peut y avoir des tensions électriques Éste símbolo indica que voltajes peligrosos están presentes en el interior.
à l'intérieur de l'appareil. Ne pas intervenir sans l'agrément No hay elementos accesibles al usuario dentro.
du service qualifié. Esta unidad sólo debería ser tratada por personal cualificado.

Précaution d'emploi : Advertencias de Seguridad


Las instrucciones de servicio cuando sean dadas, son
Les procédures de maintenance ne concernent sólo para uso de personal cualificado. Para reducir el
! ATTENTION que le service agréé. Afin de réduire le risque de riesgo de choque eléctrico no llevar a cabo ninguna
RIESGO DE CHOQUE ELECTRICO
RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE
choc électrique, il est recommandé de se limiter NO QUITAR LAS PROTECCIONNES operación de servicio aparte de las contenidas en las
ELEMENTOS NO ACCESIBLES AL
NE PAS RETIRER LE COUVERCLE aux procédures d'utilisation, à moins d'en être qualifié. USUARIO. instrucciones de operación, a menos que se esté
NE PAS INTERVENIR SANS
L'AGREMENT DU SERVICE Pour toute maintenance, contacter le service compétent. SERVICIO SOLAMENTE A PERSONAL
CUALIFICADO cualificado para realizarlas.
QUALIFIE
Referir todo el trabajo de servicio a personal cualificado.
· Pour réduire le risque de choc électrique, ne pas exposer l'appareil · Para reducir el riesgo de choque eléctrico, no exponer este equipo
dans un milieu humide. a la lluvia o humedad.

· Toujours s'assurer que l'unité est correctement alimentée, · Siempre asegurarse de que la unidad está propiamente conectada a
en particuliers à la liaison à la terre. tierra y que las conexiones de alimentación están hechas correctamente.

· La source électrique de cet équipement doit posséder une connexion · Este equipo debe ser alimentado desde un sistema de alimentación
à la terre , ainsi qu'une liaison « neutre » identifiable. con conexión a TIERRA y teniendo una conexión neutra fácilmente
identificable.
· La prise électrique qui alimente l'appareil doit être proche
de celle-ci et accessible. · La toma de alimentación para la unidad debe ser cercana y fácilmente
accesible.

Câble secteur de pays autres que les Etats-Unis Conexión de alimentación en otros países que no sean USA
L'équipement est livré avec un câble secteur au standard IEC, moulé El equipo es normalmente entregado con un cable de alimentación con un
mâle/femelle. enchufe hembra estándar IEC en un extremo y con una clavija estándar
Si vous souhaitez changr la prise mâle de votre cordon, voici les IEC en el otro. Si se requiere eliminar la clavija para sustituirla por otra,
codes couleurs des fils : disponer dicha clavija de una forma segura.
El código de color a emplear es como sigue: E E

Le fil VERT/JAUNE est connecté à T (Terre) T T


VERDE/ AMARILLO conectado a E L N N L
(Conductor de protección a Tierra
Le fil BLEU est connecté à N (Neutre) Clavija Enchufe
-Earth en el original-) Aerea Macho Aereo Hembra
Le fil MARRON est connecté à P (Phase) P N N P
Connecteur Prise AZUL conectado a N (Conductor Neutro -Neutral en el original-)
MARRÓN conectado a L (Conductor Fase -Live en el original-)

Attention si l'appareil a 2 alimentations, s'assurer que les cordons Advertencia Si la unidad tuviera dos tomas de alimentación, asegurarse
! soient branchés sur la même phase. ! de que ambos cables de alimentación están conectados a la misma fase.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 6 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Safety Information

Simboli di sicurezza: I Forklaring på sikkerhedssymboler DK


Questo simbolo indica l'informazione importante contenuta nei Dette symbol gør brugeren opmærksom på vigtig information
! manuali appartenenti all'apparecchiatura. Consultare il manuale. ! i den medfølgende manual.

Questo simbolo indica che all'interno dell'apparato sono presenti Dette symbol indikerer farlig spænding inden i apparatet. Ingen bruger
tensioni pericolose. Non cercare di smontare l'unità. servicerbare dele i apparatet på brugerniveau.
Per qualsiasi tipo di intervento rivolgersi al personale qualificato. Dette apparat må kun serviceres af faglærte personer..

Attenzione: Sikkerhedsadvarsler
Le istruzioni relative alla manutenzione sono ad uso Serviceinstruktioner er kun til brug for faglærte
! ATTENZIONE esclusivo del personale qualificato. E' proibito all'utente
! FORSIGTIG ! servicefolk. For at reducere risikoen for elektrisk
eseguire qualsiasi operazione non esplicitamente stød må bruger kun udføre anvisninger i
RISCHIO DI SHOCK ELETTRICO RISIKO FOR ELEKTRISK STØD
NON CERCARE DI SMONTARE consentita nelle istruzioni. Per qualsiasi informazione DÆKPLADER MÅ IKKE FJERNES betjeningsmanualen.
L'UNITA PER QUALSIASI TIPO DI INGEN BRUGER SERVICERBARE
INTERVENTO RIVOLGERSI AL
rivolgersi al personale qualificato. DELE SERVICE MÅ KUN UDFØRES Al service skal udføres af faglærte personer.
PERSONALE QUALIFICATO AF FAGLÆRTE PERSONER

· Per prevenire il pericolo di scosse elettriche è necessario non esporre · For at reducere risikoen for elektrisk stød må apparatet ikke
mai l'apparecchiatura alla pioggia o a qualsiasi tipo di umidità. udsættes for regn eller fugt.
· Assicurarsi sempre, che l'unità sia propriamente messa a terra e che · Sørg altid for at apparatet er korrekt tilsluttet og jordet.
le connessioni elettriche siano eseguite correttamente.
· Dette apparat skal forbindes til en nettilslutning, der yder
· Questo dispositivo deve essere collegato ad un impianto elettrico BESKYTTENDE JORD og 0 forbindelse skal være tydeligt markeret.
dotato di un sistema di messa a terra efficace.
· Stikkontakten, som forsyner apparatet, skal være tæt på apparatet
· La presa di corrente deve essere vicina all'apparecchio og let tilgængelig.
e facilmente accessibile.

Connessione elettrica nei paesi diversi dagli Stati Uniti Nettilslutning i andre lande end USA
Udstyret leveres normalt med et strømkabel med et standard IEC støbt løst
L'apparecchiatura normalmente è spedita con cavo pressofuso con la presa
hunstik i den ene ende og et standard IEC støbt hanstik i den anden ende.
e spina standard IEC. Nel caso della rimozione della spina elettrica,
Hvis et af de støbte stik på strømkablet er defekt, skal det straks kasseres på
gettarla via immediatamente osservando tutte le precauzioni del caso.
forsvarlig vis. Farvekoden for lederen er som følger:
La leggenda dei cavi è la seguente:

GRØN/GUL leder forbundet til J (Jord) J J


VERDE/GIALLO cavo connesso E E
BLÅ leder forbundet til 0
ad "E" (terra)
BRUN leder forbundet til F(Fase) F 0 0 F
BLU cavo connesso ad "N" (neutro) L N N L
Han-stik Hun-stik
Presa volante Spina volante
MARRONE cavo connesso ad "L" ( fase)

Attenzione! Nel caso in cui l'apparecchio abbia due prese di corrente, Forsigtig Hvis enheden har to lysnetindgange, skal der sørges for at
! assicurarsi che i cavi non siano collegati a fasi diverse della rete elettrica.
! begge ledninger tilsluttes lystnetudgange fra den samme fase.

Förklaring av Säkerhetssymboler S Turvamerkkien selitys FI


Denna symbol hänvisar användaren till viktig information som Tämä merkki tarkoittaa, että laitteen mukana toimitettu kirjallinen
! återfinns i litteraturen som medföljer. Se manualen. ! materiaali sisältää tärkeitä tietoja. Lue käyttöohje.

Denna symbol indikerar att livsfarlig spänning finns på insidan. Tämä merkki ilmoittaa, että laitteen sisällä on vaarallisen voimakas jännite.
Det finns inga servicevänliga delar inne i apparaten. Sisäpuolella ei ole mitään osia, joita käyttäjä voisi itse huoltaa.
Denna apparat få endast repareras av utbildad personal. Huollon saa suorittaa vain alan ammattilainen.

Säkerhetsvarningar
Turvaohjeita
Serviceinstruktioner som anges avser endast kvalificerad
! CAUTION och utbildad servicepersonal. För att minska risken för Huolto-ohjeet on tarkoitettu ainoastaan alan
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
elektrisk stöt, utför ingen annan service än den som
återfinns i medföljande driftinstruktionerna, om du ej är
! VAROITUS ammattilaisille. Älä suorita laitteelle muita
DO NOT REMOVE COVERS SÄHKÖISKUN VAARA ÄLÄ AVAA toimenpiteitä, kuin mitä käyttöohjeissa on
NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS LAITTEEN KANSIA EI SISÄLLÄ
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED behörig. Överlåt all service till kvalificerad personal. KÄYTTÄJÄLLE HUOLLETTAVIA neuvottu, ellet ole asiantuntija. Voit saada sähköiskun.
PERSONNEL ONLY OSIA HUOLTO AINOASTAAN
AMMATTILAISEN SUORITTAMANA
Jätä kaikki huoltotoimet ammattilaiselle.
· För att reducera risken för elektrisk stöt, utsätt inte apparaten för
regn eller fukt. · Sähköiskujen välttämiseksi suojaa laite sateelta ja kosteudelta.

· Se alltid till att apparaten är ordentligt jordad samt att strömtillförseln · Varmistu, että laite on asianmukaisesti maadoitettu ja että
är korrekt utförd. sähkökytkennät on tehty oikein.

· Denna apparat måste bli försörjd från ett strömsystem som är försedd · Laitteelle tehoa syöttävässä järjestelmässä tulee olla
med jordadanslutning samt ha en neutral anslutning som lätt identifierbar. SUOJAMAALIITÄNTÄ ja nollaliitännän on oltava luotettavasti
tunnistettavissa.
· Vägguttaget som strömförsörjer apparaten bör finnas i närheten samt
vara lätttillgänglig. · Sähköpistorasian tulee olla laitteen lähellä ja helposti tavoitettavissa.

Strömkontakter i länder utanför USA


Apparaten utrustas normalt med en strömkabel med standard IEC gjuten Sähkökytkentä
honkontakt på ena änden samt en standard IEC gjuten hankontakt på den Laitteen vakiovarusteena on sähköjohto, jonka toisessa päässä on muottiin
andra änden. Om man måste avlägsna den gjutna hankontkaten, avyttra valettu, IEC-standardin mukainen liitäntärasia ja toisessa päässä muottiin
denna kontakt omedelbart på ett säkert sätt. Färgkoden för ledningen är följande: valettu, IEC-standardin mukainen pistoliitin. Jos pistoliitin tarvitsee poistaa,
se tulee hävittää heti turvallisella tavalla. Johtimet kytketään seuraavasti:
GRÖN/GUL ledning ansluten till E E E

(Skyddsjordad ledare) KELTA-VIHREÄ suojamaajohdin E-napaan E E


L N N L
SININEN nollajohdin N-napaan
BLÅ ledning ansluten till N (Neutral ledare) Stickkontakt-Hane Stickkontakt-Hona
RUSKEA vaihejohdin L-napaan L N N L
BRUN ledning ansluten till L (Fas ledare) Pistoliitin Liitäntärasia

Varning! Om enheten har två huvudsakliga elförsörjningar, säkerställ att Huom! Jos laitteessa on kaksi verkkojännitteen tuloliitäntää, niiden johdot
! båda strömkablarna som är inkopplade i enheten arbetar från samma fas.
! on liitettävä verkkopistorasioihin, joissa on sama vaiheistus.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 7 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Safety Information

Símbolos de Segurança P
O símbolo triangular adverte para a necessidade de consultar o
! manual antes de utilizar o equipamento ou efectuar qualquer ajuste.

Este símbolo indica a presença de voltagens perigosas no interior


do equipamento. As peças ou partes existentes no interior do equipamento
não necessitam de intervenção, manutenção ou manuseamento por parte
do utilizador. Reparações ou outras intervenções devem ser efectuadas
apenas por técnicos devidamente habilitados.

Avisos de Segurança
As instruções de manutenção fornecidas são para
utilização de técnicos qualificados. Para reduzir o ! CAUTION
risco de choque eléctrico, não devem ser realizadas RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT REMOVE COVERS
intervenções no equipamento não especificadas no NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
manual de instalações a menos que seja efectuadas PERSONNEL ONLY

por técnicos habilitados.


· Para reduzir o risco de choque eléctrico, não expor este equipamento
à chuva ou humidade.

· Assegurar que a unidade está sempre devidamente ligada à terra e


que as ligações à alimentação estão correctas.

· O sistema de alimentação do equipamento deve, por razões de


segurança, possuir ligação a terra de protecção e ligação ao
NEUTRO devidamente identificada.

· A tomada de energia à qual a unidade está ligada deve situar-se na


sua proximidade e facilmente acessível.

Ligação da alimentação noutros países que não os EUA


O equipamento é, normalmente, enviado com cabo de alimentação com ficha
IEC fêmea standard num extremo e uma ficha IEC macho standard no extremo
oposto. Se for necessário substituir ou alterar alguma destas fichas, deverá
remove-la e elimina-la imediatamente de maneira segura.
O código de cor para os condutores é o seguinte:

Condutor VERDE/AMARELO ligado a E (Terra) E E

Condutor AZUL ligado a N (Neutro)


L N N L
Condutor CASTANHO ligado a L (Vivo). Ficha Livre Tomada Livre

Atenção: Se a unidade tem duas fontes de alimentação assegurar que os


! dois cabos de alimentação estão ligados a tomadas pertencentes à mesma fase.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 8 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Safety Information

1.2 Power cable supplied for the USA


The equipment is shipped with a power cord with a standard IEC molded free socket on one
end and a standard 3-pin plug on the other. If you are required to remove the molded mains
supply plug, dispose of the plug immediately in a safe manner.

The color code for the cord is as follows:

• GREEN lead connected to E (protective earth conductor)

• BLACK lead connected to L (live conductor)

• WHITE lead connected to N (neutral conductor)

1.3 For products with more than one power supply inlet
Caution! To reduce the risk of electric shock, plug each power supply cord into separate
branch circuits employing separate service grounds.

1.4 Handling Instructions

! CAUTION !
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO LIFT THE
UNIT USING THE HANDLES
ATTACHED TO THE FRONT PANEL.

1.5 Safety Standard


Alchemist Ph.C-HD conforms to the following standard:
EN60950-1: 2001
Safety of Information Technology Equipment.

1.6 EMC Standards


This unit conforms to the following standards:
EN 55103-1: 1996 (Environment E4)
Electromagnetic Compatibility, Product family standard for audio, video, audio-visual and
entertainment lighting control apparatus for professional use. Part 1. Emission.
EN 55103-2: 1996 (Environment E2)
Electromagnetic Compatibility, Product family standard for audio, video, audio-visual and
entertainment lighting control apparatus for professional use. Part 2. Immunity.

Federal Communications Commission Rules Part 15, Class A:2004.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 9 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Safety Information

1.7 EMC Environment


The product(s) described in this manual conform to the EMC requirements for, and are
intended for use in:

• The controlled EMC environment (for example purpose-built broadcasting or record-


ing studios), and the rural outdoor environment (far away from railways, transmitters,
overhead power lines, etc.) E4.

• The applicable environment is stated in the Technical Specifications section of the


product operation manual under “EMC Performance Information/Environment.”

1.8 EMC Performance Information


Please refer to the Technical Specifications section of the product operation manual.

EMC Performance of Cables and Connectors

Snell products are designed to meet or exceed the requirements of the appropriate European
EMC standards. In order to achieve this performance in real installations it is essential to use
cables and connectors with good EMC characteristics.

All signal connections (including remote control connections) shall be made with screened
cables terminated in connectors having a metal shell. The cable screen shall have a
large-area contact with the metal shell.

1.9 Coaxial Cables


Coaxial cables connections (particularly serial digital video connections) shall be made with
high-quality double-screened coaxial cables such as Belden 1694 or BBC type PSF1/2M.

1.10 D-type Connectors


D-type connectors shall have metal shells making good RF contact with the cable screen.
Connectors having “dimples” which improve the contact between the plug and socket shells
are recommended.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 10 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Information and Notices

2. Information and Notices

2.1 About this Manual


This manual contains information for the operation of the Alchemist Ph.C-HD unit.

2.2 Packing List


The unit is supplied in a dedicated packing carton provided by the manufacturer and should
not be accepted if delivered in inferior or unauthorized materials. Carefully unpack the carton
and check for any shipping damage or shortages.

Report any shortages or shipping damage to Snell immediately.

The unit is packed in a single cardboard box. The contents are as follows:

• Alchemist Ph.C-HD unit

• Two power cables

• Operator’s Manual CD

2.3 Software Version Amendments


This unit is fitted with V6.0.1 of the software.

2.4 Manufacturers Notice


Copyright protection claimed includes all forms and matters of copyrightable material and
information now allowed by statutory or judicial law or hereinafter granted, including without
limitation, material generated from the software programs which are displayed on the screen
such as icons, screen display looks etc.

Reproduction or disassembly of embedded computer programs or algorithms prohibited.

Copyrighted names: Microsoft Windows™

Information in this manual and software are subject to change without notice and does not
represent a commitment on the part of Snell Limited. The software described in this manual is
furnished under a license agreement and may not be reproduced or copied in any manner
without prior agreement with Snell Limited. or their authorized agents.

No part of this publication may be transmitted or reproduced in any form or by any means,
electronic or mechanical, including photocopy, recording or any information storage and
retrieval system, without permission being granted, in writing, by the publishers or their
authorized agents.

2.5 Important Notice


No responsibility is taken by the manufacturer or supplier for any non-compliance to
EMC standards due to incorrect installation.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 11 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Introduction

3. Introduction

3.1 Description
The Alchemist Ph.C-HD's conversion quality is guaranteed through the utilization of the
company's Emmy® award-winning Ph.C motion measurement technology. Ph.C algorithms,
which have been continuously refined since the introduction of the first Alchemist Ph.C in
1992, have been optimized to prevent motion-related artifacts in high-definition video. The
resulting output images are clear, sharp and free from the motion artifacts commonly
associated with standards conversion.

With Alchemist Ph.C-HD, high-definition content including news, sports, live events and
entertainment programming can now be broadcast around the globe in multiple high-definition
standards and formats without degradation of image quality. Alchemist Ph.C-HD
automatically processes image movement to produce clear, smooth motion with the widest
range of input material on the largest HD vide displays.

Alchemist Ph.C-HD provides a complete one-box system solution that can easily integrate
into any broadcast facility. It features the ability to convert between all commonly used HD
broadcast standards and formats and has been architected to accommodate new standards
as they emerge, thus future-proofing the investment of customers. Alchemist Ph.C-HD is also
capable of cross conversion, up conversion, and down conversion of the same and different
frame rates, making it a truly universal conversion platform.

3.1.1 Front Panel View

3.1.2 Rear Panel View

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 12 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Introduction

3.2 Features
• Compact 3RU size: practical for portable applications as well as mobiles, studio
installation and rental

• All in one box: easy installation and low engineering risk

• User Interface: intuitive color touch screen

• Top performance: ultimate in video conversion performance using Ph.C

• Dual redundancy: dual PSUs ensure continuous on-air live operation

• Video I/Os: HD SDI

• Audio I/Os: embedded and AES

• CleanCut: video cuts at the input appear as cuts at the output, maintaining the precise
look of the material

• Timecode: seamlessly timecode handling while performing a frame-rate conversion

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 13 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Introduction

3.3 Technical Profile

Signal Inputs

Serial digital 2 x 75 Ohm SD/HD Serial Digital with embedded audio (4 Groups)
Input Standards:
1.5 Gbit/s HD-SDI SMPTE292M/SMPTE299M
270M Mbit/s SD-SDI SMPTE259M
3Gbit/s HD - SDI SMPTE 424/425
Level A - mapping structure 1 (SMPTE 424/425)
Level B - SMPTE 372M
Dual link payload on a 3Gbit/s serial digital interface
Dual link 1.5Gbit/s SMPTE 372

Reference 2 x loop-through HDTV Trisync/SD Bisync (Black & Burst) SMPTE 240M/274M, with
auto selection dependant on output standard

Audio AES 8 channels unbalanced AES-3 via BNC connectors (75 Ohm)

Signal Outputs

Serial digital primary 2 x 75 Ohm SD/HD Serial Digital (Output A) with embedded audio (4 Groups)
(Output A) Output Standards:
1.5 Gbit/s HD-SDI SMPTE292M/SMPTE299M
270M Mbit/s SD-SDI SMPTE259M
3Gbit/s HD - SDI SMPTE 424/425
Level A - mapping structure 1 (SMPTE 424/425)
Level B - SMPTE 372M
Dual link payload on a 3Gbit/s serial digital interface
Dual link 1.5Gbit/s SMPTE 372

Serial digital 2 x 75 Ohm SD/HD Serial Digital (Output B) with embedded audio (4 Groups)
secondary (Output B) Output Standards:
1.5 Gbit/s HD-SDI
SMPTE292M/SMPTE299M
270M Mbit/s SD-SDI
3Gbit/s HD - SDI SMPTE 424/425
Level A - mapping structure 1 (SMPTE 424/425)
Level B - SMPTE 372M
Dual link payload on a 3Gbit/s serial digital interface
Dual link 1.5Gbit/s SMPTE 372

Audio AES 8 channels unbalanced AES-3 via BNC connectors (75 Ohm)

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 14 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Introduction

Control Functions

Input select Input A, Input B

Input blanking Left, Right, Top Bottom

Input loss Input, Freeze, Black

Input standard Auto


– SD 525, 625
– SD/HD 525, 625, 720 50p, 720 59p, 1080 50i, 1080 59i, 1080 50p, 1080 59p
– SD/HD with 525 29PsF, 525 59i, 625 23/24/25PsF, 625 47/48i, 625 50i, 720 50p,
FilmTools 720 59/60p, 1080 23/24/25PsF, 1080 29/30PsF, 1080 47/48i, 1080 50i, 1080 59/60i

Output Standard Auto


– Primary SD 525, 625
– Primary SD & HD 525, 625, 720 50p, 720 59p, 1080 50i, 1080 59i, 1080 50p, 1080 59p
– Secondary SD/HD 525 29PsF, 525 59i, 625 23/24/25PsF, 625 47/48i, 625 50i, 720 50p,
with FilmTools 720 59/60p, 1080 23/24/25PsF, 1080 29/30PsF, 1080 47/48i, 1080 50i, 1080 59/60i
Colorimetry

Output Standard Auto


– Secondary SD 525, 625
– Secondary SD & HD 525, 625, 720 50p, 720 59p, 1080 50i, 1080 59i, 1080 50p, 1080 59p
– Secondary SD/HD 525 29PsF, 525 59i, 625 23/24/25PsF, 625 47/48i, 625 50i, 720 50p,
with FilmTools 720 59/60p, 1080 23/24/25PsF, 1080 29/30PsF, 1080 47/48i, 1080 50i, 1080 59/60i
Colorimetry

Output blanking Left, Right, Top, Bottom

Output blanking color Red, Green, Blue

Luma Gain, Chroma ±6 dB in 0.01 dB steps


Gain, Black Level

Enhancement Horizontal and vertical

Noise reduction Noise Reducer: On/Off


Luma Strength: 0 to 30 in steps of 1 unit.
Chroma Strength: 0 to 30 in steps of 1 unit
Weighting: White, Uniform, Black
Bias: ± 7 in steps of 1 unit.
Overlay
Split Screen

Pattern Enable/Disable
100% Bars, Tartan, Sweep, 75% Bars, Pluge, Pulse & Bar, SMPTE Bars, Ramp, Burst

Freeze On/Off

Monochrome On/Off

RGB legalizer On/Off, 700mV, 721mV, 735mV

Metadata 2 x input RS485


2 x output RS485

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 15 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Introduction

Luma Clipper On/Off


White Max: 90% to 109% in steps of 1%
White Knee 60% to 109% in steps of 1%
Black Min.: -7% to 10% in steps of 1%
Black Knee: -7% to 60% in steps of 1%

Conversion Functions

Convert Ph.C™ Motion Compensation


CleanCut™

Modes SD, HD, 3Gbit/s Standard Conversion


SD, HD, 3Gbit/s Standards, Up, Down & Cross Conversion

Ph.C area 5 user-definable keys with overlays to define active and inactive areas

Aspect ratio Manual, Forced or Auto (Format) mode.


conversion Preset Input and Output ARC Settings 4:3, 16:9, 14:9LB, 16:9LB, 4:3PB, Anamorphic,
No Change User (Pan, Size, Asp, Tilt) Forced or Auto (Format) SMPTE 2016, (AFD)
Authoring

CleanCut™ On/Off
F1/F2/Any

VANC passing VANC data passed when in pass-through or ARC mode

Transition control On/Off


Field 1, Field 2, Any Field
Slew Duration: Absolute or proportional.
Slew Duration Modes: Slow Out, Linear, Standard S-Curve, S-Curve, Slow In

Aperture Presets for Sharp, Normal and Anti-Alias (can be fine-tuned using Anti-Alias controls)

Audio Functions

Audio select Embedded, AES

Audio channel Group 1 pair 1, Group 1 pair 2


selection Group 2 pair 1, Group 2 pair 2
Group 3 pair 1, Group 3 pair 2
Group 4 pair 1, Group 4 pair 2
AES1, AES2
AES3, AES4
AES5, AES6
AES7, AES8

Audio type PCM, Data

Name User can specify name of each audio pair

Tone On/Off, 1KHz -20dBFS, 4KHz -20dBFS, 1KHz -18dBFS, 4KHz -18dBFS

Mono On/Off

Mute On/Off

Pair Audio Delay Audio delay for each pair can be adjusted independently

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 16 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Introduction

Timecode Functions (Option)

Input Timecode Setup

SD Source

VITC SMPTE 12M/SMPTE266M

LTC XLR Connector, SMPTE 12M

HD Source

Emb VITC Embedded VITC, SMPTE RP188

EMB LTC Embedded LTC, SMPTE RP188

LTC XLR Connector, SMPTE 12M

Frame Count Max Detect, Format, 24, 25, 30

Output Timecode Setup

Output A

Frame Count Max Auto, 24, 25, 30

Drop Frame Mode 59.94 output rates only


DF/NDF

Output B

Frame Count Max Auto, 24, 25, 30

Drop Frame Mode 59.94 output rates only


DF/NDF

SD VITC

625 Range Lines 6/319 and 20/333


SMPTE 12M and SMPTE 266M

625 Default Lines 19/332 and 21/334


SMPTE 266M

525 Range Lines 10/273 and 17/280


SMPTE 12M and SMPTE 266M)

525 Default Lines 14/277 and 16/279


SMPTE 266M and RP164

SD Activate

VITC Enables insertion of embedded VITC

Repeat Enables repeat of VITC two lines after selected line

HD Activate

Embedded VITC Enables insertion of embedded VITC

Embedded LTC Enables insertion of embedded LTC

LTC Always enabled, follows output A

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 17 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Introduction

Timecode Control

Input Timecode Status Display


Input timecode from selected source and DF/NDF state

Output A Timecode Status Display


Output timecode generated by the Alchemist and DF/NDF mode

Output B Timecode Status Display


Output timecode generated by the Alchemist and DF/NDF mode

Timecode Entry 00h00m00s00f to 23h59s59m29f


Presets 01h00s00m00f, 10h00s00m00f

Input Trigger Set from Input timecode or the timecode entry window
Synchro & Freerun modes

Manual Trigger Manual trigger


Synchro and Freerun modes

Output A Load Set from Input timecode or the timecode entry window
Synchro & Freerun modes

Output B Load Set from Input timecode or the timecode entry window
Synchro & Freerun modes

Prerun Synchro Prerun mode set-up time

EE Window EE mode continuity window

Mode Synchro Auto, Snychro Prerun, Synchro Manual, E-E, E-E Regen, Freerun, Trigger
Load

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 18 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Introduction

FilmTools Functions (Option)

FilmTools Enable On, Off

Input Cadence Alignment Control

Auto Cadence defined by internal sequence detector unless PsF standard is detected

Detect Cadence defined by internal sequence detector in all cases

1:1 Incoming content interpreted as 1:1 cadence

2:2 F1/2 (PsF) Incoming content interpreted as 2:2 F1/2 (PsF) cadence

2:2 F2/1 Incoming content is interpreted as 2:2 F2/F1 (PsF) cadence

2:3 TC Datum Incoming content interpreted as continuous 2:3 cadence derived from continuous input
time code by identifying the specific 2:3 frame type and timecode of an input datum
frame

2:3 TC 0 and 5 Incoming content interpreted as continuous 2:3 cadence defined by a specific
relationship to the frame count of non-drop frame input timecode

2:3 Freerun Incoming content interpreted as continuous 2:3 cadence derived from an internal free
running 2:3 cadence generator.

Output Cadence Alignment Control

Off Outgoing content follows input

2:2 F1/2 (PsF) Outgoing content is generated with 2:2 F1/2 (PsF) cadence

2:2 F2/1 Outgoing content is generated with 2:2 F2/1 cadence

2:3 TC Datum Outgoing content is generated with continuous 2:3 cadence derived from continuous
output timecode by identifying the specific 2:3 frame type and timecode of an output
datum frame

2:3 TC 0 and 5 Outgoing content is generated with continuous 2:3 cadence defined by a specific
relationship to the frame count of non-drop frame timecode

2:3 Freerun Outgoing content is generated with continuous 2:3 cadence derived from an internal
free-running 2:3 cadence generator

FilmTools Control Setup

Mode

Auto Automatically selects between synchronized or interpolated conversion depending on


the input and output formats.

Synchronize Forces conversion by synchronization

Interpolation Forces conversion by interpolation

Film Aperture

Normal Maximizes vertical resolution from incoming film material. Optimum for most
applications

Sharp Maximum possible vertical resolution, less tolerant of film sequence detection errors

Safe Most tolerant of film sequence detection errors

Video to Film Blur User adjustable video to film blur control

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 19 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Introduction

FilmTools Detection Setup

Video Enable On: Allows the sequence detector to positively identify content as 1:1 (video)
Off: The sequence detector will not identify video

Film Enable

Any Allows the sequence detector to identify film of any cadence

2:2 Forces the sequence detector to identify film as 2:2 cadence only

2:3 Forces the sequence detector to identify film as 2:3 cadence only

Animation Optimized sequence detection algorithm for animation only

Off The sequence detector will not identify any content as film

Bias Normal, Video 1, Video 2, Film 1, Film 2

Window Control Allows sequence and cut detection to be restricted to specific areas of the image.
Settings are:
• Auto
• Track Input Blanking
• User (Defined by User window slider controls)

Window Overlay Enables an overlay that permits adjustment of the sequence cut/detection region.
Settings are:
• Off
• Darken
• Greyed

Dolby®E (Option)

Processing

Dolby®E - 1 Channel 1 Dolby®E transcoder / authoring path


• 1 x Dolby®D/E decoder
• 1 X Dolby®E encoder

Dolby®E - 2 Channel 2 Dolby®E transcoder / authoring paths


• 2 x Dolby®D/E decoder
• 2 x Dolby®E encoder

Controls (per Dolby®E Channel)

Decoder Source Selectable at pair level


EMB [1:8] inputs
AES [1:8] inputs
ENC1 output
ENC2 output

Encoder Source Selectable at channel level


AES [1:8] inputs
EMB [1:8] inputs
DEC1 [1:4] + AUX
DEC2 [1:4:] + AUX
Test tones

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 20 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Introduction

Decoder input Dolby e is co-timed, advanced or delayed by one frame.


alignment

Map AES monitor Enables automatic assignment of decoded dolby E audio (co-timed with video)

Metadata programs 1–8 programs available (depending on program configuration)

Metadata memories In addition to global memories 8 metadata memories are available

Metadata snapshot Enables decoder metadata to be stored and modified

PCM processing Route, delay, and gain

BLITS generator Line up tone system for use with 5.1 surround formats

Encode output Dolby E is co-timed, advanced or delayed by one frame


alignment

Controls (Output)

AES [1:8] outputs selectable at channel level

AES [1:8] inputs


EMB [1:8] inputs
DEC1 [1:4] + AUX
DEC2 [1:4] + AUX
ENC1
ENC2
Test tones

EMB A [1:8] outputs selectable


at channel level

AES [1:8] inputs


EMB [1:8] inputs
DEC1 [1:4] + AUX
DEC2 [1:4] + AUX
ENC1
ENC2
Test tones

EMB B [1:8] outputs selectable


at channel level

AES [1:8] inputs


EMB [1:8] inputs
DEC1 [1:4] + AUX
DEC2 [1:4] + AUX
ENC1
ENC2
Test tones

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 21 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Introduction

Status

Messages Booting, System OK, Fan Fail, Diagnostics Active, System Overheating, PSU Fault,
Version Unknown

System Functions

RollCall Unit ID, Unit Name, Log Server Name, RollTracks (1-8), Log Items.

Ethernet DHCP or manually configured

Panel Controls Calibrate, Clean, Timeout, Dim

Setup Shaped Horizontal Blanking (On/Off), Active Line Length (On/Off), Analog Blanking
(On/Off), Auto AES re-align, Minimum Delay

Info System (Version and build number)


MIO (Version and build number)
HMI (Version and build number)
ME (Version and build number)
FRP (Version and build number)
Options fitted

Debug Tools: Input TC Overlay, Output A TC Overlay, Output B TC Overlay


Diagnostics: MIO Autotest, HMI Autotest, ME Autotest

Memory Functions

Memory Up to 6 user setups can be saved in memory

Power

Input voltage range 100 V to 240 V rms., 50/60 Hz

Mains fuse rating T 8 AH 250 V. (Each Power supply)

Maximum input current 7 - 3 A (Each Power supply)

Power consumption 500 W

Communications

RollCall Connection to a RollCall network via BNC connector, RS422, Ethernet.

SNMP Ethernet

Mechanical

Temperature 0 to 35° C operating

Cooling Axial fan, front-to-rear airflow

Weight Approximately 20 kg

Case type 3 RU Rack Mounting

Dimensions 483 mm x 563 mm x 132 mm (w, d, h)

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 22 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Installation

4. Installation

4.1 Unpacking the Unit


The unit is packed in a single cardboard box. The contents are as follows:

• ALCHEMIST Ph.C-HD unit

• Two power cables

• Operator’s Manual CD

Unpack the box carefully and check for any shortages or shipping damage. Report any
shortages or shipping damage to Snell immediately.

Retain the packaging as this must be used in the event that the unit is returned to Snell.

The Alchemist Ph.C-HD unit weighs more than 18 kg. Appropriate manual handling
precautions should be taken when lifting the unit.

4.2 Removing the Transit Bar


Remove the transit bar before installing the unit into an enclosure.

To remove the transit bar, open the front panel and remove the two screws and the transit bar,
as shown in the diagram below.

The transit bar must be in place before transporting the Alchemist Ph.C-HD. Failure to do
so may result in damage to the unit.

If you remove the transit bar to install the unit in an enclosure, ensure that you retain the
transit bar and screws.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 23 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Installation

4.3 Connecting Power to the Alchemist Ph.C-HD


Note: Before connecting power to the unit, see “Safety Information” on page 6.

4.3.1 Power Inlets and Power Supply Switches


Mains power is supplied to the unit via two
fused, filtered IEC connectors. The lower IEC
connector (as viewed from the rear of the unit)
powers the lower PSU.

The rated current for each power supply is 7 -


3 A 100 V 240 V 50/60 Hz.

The fuse rating for each power supply is T 8


AH 250 V.

The On/Off switches for the power supplies


are located on the rear panel adjacent to the
power inlet connectors.

Power connectors and switches

4.3.2 Power Supply LEDs


When illuminated, the green LEDs indicate that the power supplies are operational.
.

PSU LEDs

4.3.3 Power Supplies


The Alchemist Ph.C-HD supports dual power supplies for redundancy.

For dual redundancy operation both power supplies must be powered up and functioning. The
unit will work correctly with only one supply operating but would not have dual redundancy
under those conditions.

To reduce the risk of electric shock, plug each power supply cord into separate branch
circuits employing separate service grounds.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 24 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Installation

4.3.4 Supply Voltage


The unit automatically senses the nominal supply voltage and sets itself up accordingly. No
voltage adjustment procedure is required.

4.4 Environment
Although constructed to meet the normal environmental requirements, it is important that
there is a free flow of air at the front, rear and left side to dissipate the heat produced during
operation. Installations should be designed to allow for this.

The ventilation holes on the rear of the unit must not be obscured or damage to the
equipment may result.

If the unit is to be rack mounted, first open the front panel (detailed above). The fixing “ears”
behind the panel will be revealed and the unit can be mounted in the rack.

The Alchemist Ph.C-HD unit weighs more than 18 kg. Appropriate manual handling
precautions should be taken when lifting the unit.

Under no circumstances should the grip handles be used to lift the Alchemist Ph.C-HD
unit.

4.5 Handling Precautions


Touchscreen and TFT-LCD:

• Do not press or scratch the display using any object with a sharp edge or end.

• Do not use or store the product under a condition where it will be exposed to after,
organic solution or acid.

• Do not use under direct sunlight.

• Do not disassemble the touchscreen.

• Clean with a soft cloth or a soft cloth with a neutral detergent or alcohol. When
contaminated by chemicals wipe them off immediately with caution so as to not to
cause injury to the human body.

• The LCD Polarizer is made of a soft material and must be handled carefully.

• Wipe off water drops or finger grease immediately. Long term contact with water may
cause discoloration or spots.

• The TFT-LCD module incorporates glass that may break or crack if abused. Please
handle with care.

• Do not expose the module to direct sunlight or intense ultraviolet rays for long periods.

• If LCD panel breaks, liquid crystal may escape from the panel. Avoid contact with the
eyes or mouth. If the liquid crystal comes in contact with any part of the body or
clothes it should be washed off immediately with soap and water.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 25 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Installation

4.6 Connections
All the connectors are mounted on the rear of the unit, and are appropriately annotated.

4.6.1 Inputs

AES Inputs Dolby Metadata Inputs LTC IN

SDI A and SDI B Reference A and B

4.6.1.1 SDI A, SDI B

Two SDI inputs via BNC connectors for 75 Ohms.

4.6.1.2 Genlock Reference Ref A and B

Two pairs of loop-through BNC connectors for 75 Ohms are provided that may be connected
to external sources of reference signals.

4.6.1.3 AES Inputs

These are the eight AES inputs via BNC connectors for 75 Ohms.

4.6.1.4 LTC IN

A standard Longitudinal Time Code signal may be connected to this XLR connector.

This input requires a mating male locking XLR connector. To remove the connector the
release tab must be pushed in.

4.6.1.5 Dolby Metadata Inputs

Dolby Metadata input is via two D-type connectors.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 26 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Installation

4.6.2 Outputs

AES Outputs Dolby Metadata Outputs LTC OUT

SDI Outputs

4.6.2.1 Output A & Output B

Alchemist Ph.C HD provides two pairs of HD/SD serial digital outputs.

4.6.2.2 AES Outputs

These are the eight AES outputs via BNC connectors for 75 Ohms.

4.6.2.3 LTC Out

This XLR connector provides a standard Longitudinal Time Code signal.

This output requires a mating female XLR connector.

4.6.2.4 Dolby Metadata Inputs

Dolby Metadata is output via two D-type connectors.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 27 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Installation

4.6.3 Communication Connections

Control
10/100

RS422 ROLLNET GPIO

4.6.3.1 ROLLNET

The unit can be controlled via RollCall using the BNC connector, the Remote RS-422 9-way
D-type connector, and Ethernet (control 10/100).

4.6.3.2 RS422

The unit can be controlled via RollCall using the D-Type connector.

Pin Function Direction

1 Ground

6 Tx signal
common

2 Transmit A A Ph.C → Remote

7 Transmit B A Ph.C → Remote

3 Receive B A Ph.C ← Remote

8 Receive A A Ph.C ← Remote

4 Rx signal
common

9 Ground

5 Spare

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 28 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Installation

4.6.3.3 Control 10/100

This RJ45 connector socket allows the unit to be connected to the RollCall 32-bit control
panel via an Ethernet connection.

This connector is not intended for direct connection to a telecommunications network.

4.6.3.4 GPI

The General Purpose Interfaces (GPIs) are accessed via a 25-way D-type female connector.
In the table GPI refers to inputs and GPO refers to outputs.

Pin Function

2 GPI 0 Signal

14 GPI 0 Return

3 GPI 1 Signal

15 GPI 1 Return

4 GPI 2 Signal

16 GPI 2 Return

5 GPI 3 Signal

17 GPI 3 Return

6 GPI 4 Signal

18 GPI 4 Return

7 GPI 5 Signal

19 GPI 5 Return

8 GPO 4 Signal

20 GPO 4 Return

9 GPO 5 Signal

21 GPO 5 Return

10 GPO 0 Signal

22 GPO 0 Return

11 GPO 1 Signal

23 GPO 1 Return

12 GPO 2 Signal

24 GPO 2 Return

13 GPO 3 Signal

25 GPO 3 Return

1 Ground

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 29 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Installation

4.6.3.5 GPI Connector Pin Numbers (D-type female connector on the unit)

The output (GPO) characteristics are as follows:

Operating Voltage Range 0 to ±60 V

(DC/AC peak)

Maximum Load current 1.0 A (AC/DC)

Maximum On-State Resistance @ Tamb 500 mOhm


=+25°C

Minimum Off-State Resistance

@Tamb =+25°C,V=±48V 100 MOhm

4.6.3.6 GPI Overview

The GPI provides contact closure tally outputs that can be used to turn on lamps etc.

The equivalent circuit of the GPI input is shown below.

Note: On a standard machine when delivered, GPI inputs 0–5 select machine memories 1–6 and
GPI outputs 0–5 provide tally outputs indicating which memory is selected.

4.7 Headphones
On the front panel is a 1/4” headphone jack socket. The headphones can be used to monitor
decoded PCM.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 30 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5. Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.1 Overview
At start-up, the Home screen appears displaying a block diagram of the unit’s current
functionality and details of current selections.

Items highlighted in yellow indicate that the control setting has been changed from its default
value.

All operational parameters and selections can be made by touching items on the screen.
Settings can be changed using scroll bars or by using the spinwheel.

5.2 Main Toolbar Selections

• Touching the Back button returns the display to the previously selected screen.

• Touching the Home button returns the display to the Home screen from any stage in
the menu hierarchy.

5.3 Warnings and Notifications


If there is a problem with a function, the color of the item on the Home screen will change from
a blue background to a red background.

Similarly, if there is a minor problem with a function, the color of the item on the Home screen
will change from a blue background to an orange background.

Note: If a control setting has been changed from the default or preset value, the function will
appear highlighted in yellow on this screen.

5.4 Panel Lock


The lock icon shows that the panel is unlocked and is operational. When this item is selected,
the panel will be locked. A red line will appear under the lock icon to indicate this.

Touch Yes to unlock the panel or No to keep the panel locked.

Note: When the panel is locked, functions may still be selected but settings cannot be changed.
This condition is indicated by the items appearing dimmed.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 31 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.5 Timeout
The panel will automatically lock after a timeout period and the dialog box shown below will
appear.

Touch Unlock to unlock the panel or Cancel to leave the panel locked.

5.6 Selecting Parameters and Making Adjustments


In the example below, the Proc Amp item has been selected. This reveals a screen that
allows the Proc Amp controls to be selected. The Gain is selected, the Gain adjustment
screen appears.

The values may be changed by using:

• The spinwheel. This allows the last selected control (highlighted green) to be
adjusted.

• The sliding scroll bar (Change Value).

• The Reduce or Increase (by fixed increments) Value control.

• The Preset function .

• The direct Value Entry function.

• The preset values are shown above the symbol.

When the direct Value Entry function is activated, a numerical keypad will be displayed.
Values may be entered by touching the numbers on the keypad. This value will be shown in a
box at the top right of the keypad area.

• OK enters the value and removes the keypad from the screen.

• Cancel removes the keypad from the screen without accepting the value.

• Del clears the last number entered.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 32 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.7 Selecting Specific Functions


The Alchemist Ph.C-HD functions are grouped into seven main areas:

• Video Menus: The Video Menus are used to configure and control the unit’s video
functions. For more information, see page 34.

• Audio Menus: The Audio Menus are used to configure and control the unit’s audio
and Dolby E functions. For more information, see page 61.

• Status Display: The Status display, on the unit’s Home screen, displays messages
and warnings about the unit’s state and provides basic information about the settings
and functions. For more information, see page 107.

• System: The System screen is used to control the unit’s RollCall setup, configure the
touch panel, and provides informational and diagnostic tools. For more information,
see page 106.

• Memory: The Memory screen is used to store system configurations so that they can
be recalled later. For more information, see page 120.

• Timecode Tab: The Timecode tab provides access to the menus used to configure
and control the unit’s timecode functions. For more information, see page 79.

• FilmTools Tab: The FilmTools tab provides access to the menus used to configure
and control the unit’s film conversion functions. For more information, see page 87.

• VANC Tab: The VANC tab provides access the menus used to control vertical
ancillary blanking. For more information, see page 98.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 33 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.8 Video Menus


This section describes the Alchemist Ph.C-HD video functions, which include the following
configuration settings and controls:

• Input: Use these settings to specify the input source, input, actions that the unit
should take upon signal loss and the input blanking settings. See “Input” on page 35.

• Conversion: Use these settings to enable or disable the Ph.C and CleanCut
features, specify Aperture settings, and to set up Ph.C areas that can be used, for
example, to protect transparent logos. See “Conversion” on page 38.

• Aspect Control: Use these settings to define the input aspect ratio, select preset
output aspect ratios, and to perform custom aspect ratio adjustments. See “Aspect
Control” on page 42.

• Proc Amp: Use these settings to adjust image gain and black level, enhance the
image, and apply alias suppression and noise reduction. See “Proc Amp” on page 50.

• Output A & Output B: Use these settings to define the output standards, colorimetry
settings, output border settings, output blanking, and to change the output names if
desired. See “Output A and Output B” on page 53.

• Reference: Use these settings to enable and specify the source of the reference
signal, and to adjust the relative timing of the reference signal to the output signal.
See “Reference” on page 57.

• Utilities: Use these settings to enable a test pattern, specify the test pattern to be
displayed, freeze the output picture, display the output as a monochrome image, and
configure gamut legalization. See “Utilities” on page 58.

Video

Aspect
Processing Control Output A&
Input Utilities Proc Amp Reference
(Conversion) Output B

Source Pattern Enable Ph.C Output A and Gain Output Standard Reference Enable
Output B Mode
Standard Pattern Type Clean Cut Colorimetry Reference Source
Black Level
Manual ARC
On Loss Freeze Aperture Settings Enhance Border Horizontal Timing

Blanking Monochrome Ph.C Area Forced Memory Alias Output Blanking Vertical Timing
Suppresion
Legalizer Display Memory Output Name
Setup Noise
Reduction

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 34 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.8.1 Input
When Input is selected, the Input screen appears. Use this screen to specify the input signal
options.

5.8.1.1 Source

This allows either SDI A or SDI B to be selected as the input signal for the unit.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 35 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.8.1.2 Standard

To view the input standard, touch Select. The unit automatically detects the input standard.
The standards that the unit can detect are displayed

Note: If a standard is not available it will appear grayed-out. For example, if the FilmTools option
has not been purchased, or has not been enabled, the standards related to film-based
input cannot be selected.

Note: If the unit does not recognize the input standard, it will report an input loss or error.

5.8.1.3 On Loss

This specifies the action the Alchemist will take in the event of an input loss.

5.8.1.4 Dual Link Crossover

• Auto (default): Using the SPMTE352 payload identification present in Dual Link the
Alchemist will automatically correct when the input links are crossed over. If the
payload is not present, no action is taken.

• OFF: Input link A and B are NOT crossed over.

• ON: Input links A and B are crossed over.

When the crossover feature is in effect (via Auto or ON) a crossover symbol will be present
within the Input section of the home screen.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 36 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.8.1.5 Colorimetry

The Colorimetry function controls the color space conversion standard of the input signal. To
specify the Colorimetry setting, touch Select and in the dialog box that appears, choose one
of the following options:

Auto The most appropriate color space conversion for the signal is selected,
as determined from the definition of the output video standard.

REC 601 Color space conversion to REC 601 standards is applied.

SMPTE 240 Color space conversion to SMPTE 240 standards is applied.

SMPTE 274 Color space conversion to SMPTE 274 standards is applied.

BT 709 Color space conversion to BT 709 standards is applied.

None No color space conversion is applied.

5.8.1.6 Blanking

The Blanking function allows the adjustment of input blanking. It is used where the source
video is known to have pixels/lines at the edge of the picture that are not required to be
displayed. When set, the unit will blank any output data generated by the input data,
regardless of the display control settings.

Left Adjusts the left-hand edge of blanking. A setting of 1 indicates that no


input pixels that are normally visible should be blanked, 2 causes the
first input pixel to be blanked, etc.

Right Adjusts the right-hand edge of blanking. A value equal to the number of
active pixels per line in the current input standard indicates that no input
pixels that are normally visible should be blanked. Subtracting 1 from
this causes the last input pixel to be blanked, etc.

Top Adjusts the top edge of blanking. A setting of 1 indicates that no input
lines that are normally visible should be blanked, 2 causes the first
input line to be blanked, etc.

Bottom Adjusts the bottom edge of blanking. A value equal to the number of
active pixels per line in the current input standard indicates that no input
lines that are normally visible should be blanked. Subtracting 1 from
this causes the last input line to be blanked, etc.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 37 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.8.2 Conversion
When Conversion is selected, the screen shown below is displayed. This function allows
conversion options to be selected.

5.8.2.1 Ph.C (Phase Correlation)

On selects motion compensated conversion and Off selects linear conversion.

5.8.2.2 FilmTools

On enables the FilmTools options and Off disables the FilmTools options.

For more information about FilmTools, see “FilmTools” on page 86 and “Appendix D:
FilmTools” on page 144.

5.8.2.3 Aperture

The Aperture settings are provided to maximize vertical resolution without introducing alias.

The optimal Aperture setting is dependant on the quality of the source and the conversion
being performed. For example, down converting sharp HD content to SD demands greater
care with setup than an HD to HD cross conversion.

Each Aperture can be fine tuned using the Alias Suppression control. See “Alias
Suppression” on page 51.

For each channel (A or B), the following Aperture adjustments can be made:

• Sharp preserves the most vertical resolution from the input pictures.

• Normal provides the best compromise for typical input pictures.

• Anti-Alias is designed to prevent objectionable aliases in the output pictures.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 38 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.8.2.4 CleanCut

Note: When the FilmTools option is enabled, the CleanCut concept of forcing a cut on field one or
field two is not necessarily applicable.

CleanCut ensures no interpolation occurs between images either side of a cut. Under
extreme circumstances, it may be necessary to disable CleanCut should a false cut be
detected.

Any Field Cuts are Output on the closest Output field boundary to the detected
input cut.

Field 1 Only Cuts are restricted such that the first field of a new scene always begins
on a field one.

Field 2 Only Cuts are restricted such that the first field of a new scene always begins
on a field two.

When configuring the Alchemist Ph.C to use both interlaced and progressive Outputs, two
factors must be considered when setting CleanCut options:

• Output A is always the primary Output and Output B is always the secondary Output.

• Field based cuts can only be made with an interlaced input.

When both interlaced and progressive Outputs are required, and field-specific cuts are
required on the interlaced Output, Output A must be interlaced and Output B progressive. If
the Outputs are configured the other way around, there is no way of ensuring that cuts will
occur on the correct field.

The table below illustrates the relationships between Primary/Secondary Outputs, the
selected CleanCut mode, and the resulting cuts.

Output Format CleanCut

Cut Cut Cut


Primary (A) Secondary (B)
Any Field Field 1 Field 2
i i 9 9 9
i P 9 9 9
P i 9 x x
P P 9 x x

i = Interlaced (525, 625, 1080i 50, 1080i 59)

P = Progressive (720p 50, 720p 59)

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 39 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

Using the Alchemist Ph.C-HD as a Frame Synchronizer

In instances where the input and Output are both interlaced, and of the same frame rate, the
Alchemist Ph.C-HD functions as a frame synchronizer.

If interlaced Output (in which the unit functions as a frame synchronizer) and progressive
Output are both required, the interlaced Output should be set to Output A and the progressive
Output should be set to Output B. If configured the other way it cannot be guaranteed that
input dominance will be maintained.

Frame
Primary (A) Secondary (B)
Synchronization
i i
9
i P
9
P i x
P P x

i = Interlaced (525, 625, 1080i 50, 1080i 59)

P = Progressive (720p 50, 720p 59)

5.8.2.5 Ph.C Area

Selecting Ph.C Area on the Conversion screen reveals the Ph.C Area screen.

The controls on the Ph.C Area screen allow Ph.C motion compensation to be disabled on
certain areas of the image. Typical applications for this feature include protecting static
computer generated captions overlaid onto dynamic sports coverage, or very small, low
contrast, or transparent logos in front of dynamic action.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 40 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

This is done by specifying an active area and/or an inactive area of the image. The inactive
area, when Enabled, is converted linearly. Any region outside the active area, if Enabled, will
also be converted linearly. The remainder of the image will be converted using Ph.C motion
compensation. To assist set up, a colored Overlay may be activated.

The active area is shown in green, inactive in red.

Up to five Key areas can be specified. These Key areas are numbered in ascending priority.
That is, Key 2 has priority over Key 1, and so on. If two Keys overlap, the action specified for
the area with the higher priority occurs.

Example source with dynamic video and logo. Colored overlay after adjustment to convert the
source shown on the right.

Select Key To select a Key, press the corresponding Key button (Key 1 to Key 5).
After selecting the Key, use the Key Controls to set up the Key area.

Reset All Press Reset All Keys to return all of the Keys to their default settings.
Keys

Key Control When the Enable option is selected, the Key area is enabled and can
be adjusted.

When the Active option is selected, the Key area will use
motion-compensated conversion, and the Key overlay, if displayed, will
appear in green. When it is not selected, the Key area will use linear
conversion, and the Key overlay, if displayed, will appear in red.

Use the slider controls (Left Edge, Right Edge, Top Edge, and
Bottom Edge) to adjust the size and position of the selected Key area.

Press Reset Key to return the selected Key to its default settings,
leaving the other Keys unchanged.

Background When the Active option is selected, the background area uses Ph.C
motion compensated conversion, and the background overlay, if
displayed, appears in green. When the Active option is not selected,
the background area uses linear conversion, and the background
overlay, if displayed, appears in red.

Overlays Select Ph.C to display the Ph.C overlay.

Select Keys to display the Key overlays.

Keys in use This line displays the Keys that are currently in use. When a Key is in
use, its name is displayed in the color that corresponds to its Select
Key button. When a Key is not in use its name is displayed in black.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 41 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

Key n This line displays the following information about the currently selected
key:

Whether the Key is On or Off.


(Where n is
the selected Whether Ph.C is Active or Inactive.
Key.)
The positions, in pixels, of the Left Edge, Right Edge, Top Edge, and
Bottom Edge.

5.8.3 Aspect Control


When Aspect Control is selected, the screen shown below is displayed. The aspect control
functions are used to control the size and shape of the output picture.

For both Output A and Output B, the Aspect Ratio Conversion mode is selected from the
following modes.

The Forced and Auto modes offer a means to select one of the four preconfigured display
memories. Each display memory stores size, tilt, pan and an SMPTE 2016 code. Each
display memory has a default configuration that can be reconfigured as required
.

Manual This mode allows the ARC settings to be manually adjusted. Touch
Manual ARC Settings to access the manual ARC controls

Forced This mode forces the display memory specified on the Forced Memory
screen to be used. The settings for the Forced Memories are specified
on the Display Memory Setup screen.

Auto This mode automatically recalls the relevant display memory based in
(Format) the Input/Output selection.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 42 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.8.3.1 Manual Aspect Control

The aspect ratio conversion performed by the Alchemist Ph.C-HD is determined by several
interrelated factors:

• The current input standard

• The selected input aspect ratio

• The current output standard

• The selected aspect ratio conversion

• Fixed aspect ratio adjustments

5.8.3.2 Input Aspect Ratio

The available input aspect ratio options are determined by the current input standard. Only
those aspect ratios that are appropriate to the input standard will be displayed.

To specify the input aspect ratio, touch the button that corresponds to the actual input aspect
ratio.

In turn, the selected input aspect ratio will determine the output aspect ratio options that are
available for selection.

Note that if the input standard is changed, the possible input aspect ratios will also change
and the input aspect ratio will need to be reselected.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 43 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.8.3.3 Output Aspect Ratio (A and B)

The available output aspect ratio conversions are determined by the selected input aspect
ratio and the current output standard. Only those common aspect ratio conversions that are
appropriate to both are displayed.

To specify the output aspect ratio, touch the button that corresponds to the desired output
aspect ratio.

To lock the Channel B aspect ratio to that of Channel A, select Lock to A.

After selecting the output aspect ratio, the slider bars on the right are automatically adjusted
to achieve the desired aspect ratio conversion.

Note: If the input standard, selected input aspect ratio, or output standard is changed, the
possible output aspect ratio options will also change and the output aspect ratio will need
to be reselected.

5.8.3.4 Aspect Ratio Adjustments

After the input and output aspect ratios have been set, these controls will have been
automatically adjusted to achieve the desired conversion. However, it is possible to adjust
aspect ratio conversion using these controls. For example, after selecting the aspect ratio
conversion, the output image could be slightly overscanned by adjusting the size control.

To adjust these controls, move the slider bars as required.

Size This adjusts the size of the whole image. Both vertical and horizontal
size change together while maintaining the aspect ratio of the image.
The range of control is from 40% to 200% in 0.01% steps.

Pan This adjusts the horizontal position of the output image. The range of
control is ±75% in 0.01% steps.

Asp This adjusts the horizontal size of the image, allowing the shape
(aspect ratio) of the output image to be changed. The range of control
is from 50% to 150% in 0.01% steps.

Tilt This adjusts the vertical position of the output image. The range of
control is ±75% in 0.01% steps.

Note: If manual changes are made to the aspect ratio adjustments, they will be retained after the
unit has been turned off. However, if a new fixed mode is selected they will be lost. If
adjustments are made, store the setup in a user memory so that it can be recalled later.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 44 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.8.3.5 Transition Control

When Transition Control is selected, the screen shown below is displayed. These controls
are used to define the temporal control of a slewed transition. The profile is illustrated
graphically on the front panel’s button.

Slew On/Off

These controls enable or disable the transition control settings.

Transition Control

Any Slew transitions will occur on either field 1 or field 2.

Field 1 only Slew transitions will only occur on a field 1.

Field 2 only Slew transitions will only occur on a field 2.

Slew Duration Mode

Absolute The aspect ratio change will occur over the period defined by the Slew
Duration control.

Proportional The aspect ratio change will occur over the period defined by the Slew
Duration control after scaling by the magnitude of the aspect ratio
change.

For example, given a slew duration setting of 10 fields, a size change


from 50% to 100% will take 10 fields; a size change from 50% to 200%
will take 20 fields. That is, each scaling by a factor of 2 occurs over the
period defined by the slew duration setting.

Slew Duration Unit

Fields Slew duration will be defined in number of fields.

Seconds Slew duration will be defined in number of seconds.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 45 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

Slew Duration

This control defines the time it takes for a slewed transition to occur. The duration can be
defined in fields or seconds according to the Slew Duration Units control.

The actual duration of the transition between different aspect ratios also depends on the Slew
Duration Mode control.

Slew Profile

The slew’s rate of change exponentially changes from an initial


maximum rate of change down to zero.
(Slow Out)

The slew maintains a constant rate of change from beginning to end.

(Linear)

The slew's rate of change ramps up from zero at the beginning and
down to zero to the end with maximum rate of change in the middle.
(Standard
S-Curve)

The slew's rate of change ramps up and down exponentially with a


higher maximum rate of change in the middle.
(S-Curve)

The slew's rate of change exponentially increases from zero up to the


maximum rate of change.
(Slow In)

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 46 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.8.3.6 Forced Memory

The selections on the Forced Memory screen allow the display memory that will be used
when in the Aspect Control mode is Forced. These display memories are configured on the
Display Memory Setup screen.

5.8.3.7 Display Memory Setup

The Display Memory Setup screen allows the display memories to be configured. Each
display memory has a default configuration, but this configuration can be changed as
required.

Default Settings

ARC AFD Coded Description


Settings Code Frame

SD to SD 1:1 1000 4:3 Full frame 4:3 image, same as


coded frame.

SD to HD Size 100% 1001 16:9 Pillarbox 4:3 image horizontally


ASP75% centered in coded frame.

HD to SD Size 75% 1010 4:3 Letterbox 16:9 image vertically


ASP133.33% centered in coded frame (all image
areas protected).

HD to HD 1:1 1000 16:9 Full frame 16:9 image same as


coded frame.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 47 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

Select Display Memory

Touch Select to choose the display memory to be shown and, if required, modified.

Display Memory Settings

The current display memory settings are displayed in this section.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 48 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

Adjust Selected Memory Display

This section allows the display memory settings to be configured.

Default Recalls the default settings for the selected memory.

Preset Resets the Size, Pan, Asp, and Tilt settings to their preset values.

Size: 100%

Pan: 0.00%

Asp: 100%

Tilt: 0.00%

Current Recalls the current settings stored in the selected memory.

Preview Allows the user to preview the ARC adjustments being made.

Coded Sets the coded frame as either 4:3 or 16:9.


Frame

AFD Code Click Select to choose the desired 4 bit coded frame.

Size, Pan, Use the sliders to adjust the values as required.


Asp, Tilt

Accept Stores the adjustments into the selected memory.


Changes

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 49 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.8.4 Proc Amp


When Proc Amp is selected, the screen shown below is displayed.

5.8.4.1 Gain

When Gain is selected, the screen shown below is displayed, where the luminance,
chrominance and black level settings can be adjusted.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 50 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.8.4.2 Enhance

When Enhance is selected, the screen shown below is displayed. This controls the amount of
detail enhancement that may be applied.

Horiz(ontal) This adjusts the levels of high frequency horizontal information to make
the output pictures appear sharper. The enhancer range is 0 to 100% in
1% steps and the default value is 0.

Vert(ical) This controls the amount of detail processing in the vertical filters. The
enhancer adjusts the levels of high frequency vertical information to
make the output pictures appear sharper. The enhancer range is 0 to
100% in 1% steps and the default value is 0.

5.8.4.3 Alias Suppression

When Alias Suppression is selected, the screen shown below is displayed.

Horiz(ontal) This works in sympathy with the Aperture control and allows the user to
suppress horizontal alias in the output picture. The range of adjustment
is -50 to +50 and the default value is 0.

Vert(ical) This works in sympathy with the Aperture control and allows the user to
suppress vertical alias in the output picture. The range of adjustment is
-50 to +50 and the default value is 0.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 51 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.8.4.4 Noise Reduction

When Noise Reduction is selected, the screen shown below is displayed. The controls on
this screen enable various amounts of noise reduction to be applied to the signal. By default,
noise reduction is not enabled. For more information, see “Appendix A: Noise Reduction” on
page 121.

Enable Select this check box to enable noise reduction.

By default noise reduction is disabled.

Y Strength This adjusts the amount of noise reduction applied to the luminance
signal. The range of adjustment is from 30 to 0 in steps of 1. The preset
value is 0.

C Strength This adjusts the amount of noise reduction applied to the chrominance
signal. The range of adjustment is from 30 to 0 in steps of 1. The preset
value is 0.

Weight When the source material is biased towards white or black, this setting
enables noise reduction to be concentrated on the whites or blacks.

Touch Select to specify the noise reducer weighting.

Uniform: Provides uniform noise reduction.

Black: Concentrates noise reduction on the blacks.

White: Concentrates noise reduction on the whites.

The preset value is Uniform.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 52 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

Bias The noise reduction adaptation algorithm distinguishes between static


(or temporal) and moving (or spatial) regions of the image. This setting
allows the algorithm to be adjusted towards temporal (a positive value)
or spatial (a negative value) processing.

The range of adjustment is ±7 units. The preset value is 0.

Overlay An overlay feature is available to assist in adjusting the bias settings.

When the overlay is enabled, colored regions indicate areas of the


image where spatial processing is being used, and monochrome
regions indicate where temporal processing is being used.

Split Screen Select Split Screen to display a split screen view of the output image.
One side of the screen displaying the image without noise reduction
applied, and the other side showing the image with noise reduction
applied.

The Luma Strength, Chroma Strength, and Weight settings are independent of, and have no
effect on, the overlay.

5.8.5 Output A and Output B


When the Output A item is selected, the screen shown below is displayed. This screen allows
various options to be selected for the output signal.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 53 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.8.5.1 Output Standard

This screen allows the output standard to be selected.

This allows the required output format to be chosen. After selection this format will be
displayed in the Output Standard box.

Output B must be of the same frame rate as specified for Output A. When selecting the
Output B standard, the available choices are determined by the Output A standard. For
example, if 1080 59i is selected as the Output A standard, only 525 59i, 1080 59i, 1080 59P
and 720 59P may be selected as the Output B standard.

5.8.5.2 Colorimetry

This function controls the color space conversion that is applied to the signal.

To specify the Colorimetry setting, touch Select and in the dialog box that appears, choose
one of the following options:

Auto The most appropriate color space conversion for the signal is selected,
as determined from the definition of the output video standard.

REC 601 Color space conversion to REC 601 standards is applied.

SMPTE 240 Color space conversion to SMPTE 240 standards is applied.

SMPTE 274 Color space conversion to SMPTE 274 standards is applied.

BT 709 Color space conversion to BT 709 standards is applied.

None No color space conversion is applied.

5.8.5.3 VANC Output

VANC output can be enabled and disabled independently for output A and output B.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 54 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.8.5.4 1080P Outputs

• Level A: 3Gbit/s SMPTE424/425, Level A Mapping structure (SMPTE274 1920x1080


4:2:2 10 bit)

• Level B: 3Gbit/s SMPTE424/425, Level B SMPTE 372 Dual Link payload (SMPTE274
1920x1080 4:2:2 10bit)

• Dual Link: Dual Link 1.5Gbit/s SMPTE372 (SMPTE274 1920x1080 4:2:2 10bit)

5.8.5.5 Border

This screen allows the user to adjust the appearance of any blanking border around the active
picture. By default, the color of any border around the active picture is black. However, the
user can adjust this to any desired color.

The border color is controlled by adjusting the amount of Red (R), Green (G) and Blue (B) in
the border. The RGB values are displayed as 10-Bit digital video levels.

The default value for all the border colors is 64, which produces a black border. Note also that
when the border is enabled and its color adjusted away from black then there is often a black
band between the active picture and the color border.

This occurs when the active picture does not completely fill the digital active line length of the
input standard. To remove this black band the input blanking should be adjusted via the
Input-Active menus to match the blanking of the incoming program material.

To activate the border, select Enable. If the border is not enabled then it will appear black
regardless of the settings of the red, green and blue border values.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 55 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.8.5.6 Output Blanking

This function allows the adjustment of output blanking. It is used where the source video is
known to have pixels/lines at the edge of the picture that are not required to be displayed.
When set, the machine will blank any output data generated by the input data, regardless of
the display control settings.

Left This adjusts the left-hand edge of blanking. A setting of 1 indicates that
no input pixels that are normally visible should be blanked, 2 causes
the first input pixel to be blanked, etc.

Right This adjusts the right-hand edge of blanking. A value equal to the
number of active pixels per line in the current input standard indicates
that no input pixels that are normally visible should be blanked.
Subtracting 1 from this causes the last input pixel to be blanked, etc.

Top Adjusts the top edge of blanking. A setting of 1 indicates that no input
lines that are normally visible should be blanked, 2 causes the first
input line to be blanked, etc.

Bottom Adjusts the bottom edge of blanking. A value equal to the number of
active pixels per line in the current input standard indicates that no input
lines that are normally visible should be blanked. Subtracting 1 from
this causes the last input line to be blanked, etc.

5.8.5.7 Output Name

To change the name of the output, select the Edit item and use the keyboard to edit the text.
Select OK to enable the new name.

Note: This name will replace the name appearing on all other screens.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 56 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.8.6 Reference
When Reference is selected, the screen shown below is displayed.

5.8.6.1 Reference Enable

This allows the genlock function to be turned ON or OFF. When Enable is checked the unit
will genlock to the selected reference source.

When Enable is unchecked the unit will ignore any reference signals and will be in the
free-run mode.

5.8.6.2 Reference Source

This allows the reference source to be selected


.

Auto When reference source is set to Auto, the system will look at each of
the reference inputs and pick the one most appropriate to the current
output standard. This process is triggered by one of two events; either
Auto has just been selected, or the output standard has changed.
Once the reference has been picked the system will continue to use
that reference until another trigger event occurs.

When selecting the correct reference, a reference that is the same


standard as the output would be considered the most appropriate,
followed by a reference of the same frame rate. If neither of these is
available, then the system will look to see if there are any references
applied and if so, will lock to that. If reference A and B 'score' the same
(whether there is a match or not) then reference A is favored.

Auto should be used in the majority of cases.

Ref A Forces the unit to operate from the external reference A input.

It will force it to be used regardless of whether it is the correct standard


or not, or indeed if there is a reference signal connected at all.
Therefore this setting should be used with caution.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 57 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

Ref B Forces the unit to operate from the external reference B input.

It will force it to be used regardless of whether it is the correct standard


or not, or indeed if there is a reference signal connected at all.
Therefore this setting should be used with caution.

Input The unit will be locked to the input signal.

Horizontal This allows the horizontal timing of the reference signal to be adjusted.
Timing

Vertical This allows the vertical timing of the reference signal to be adjusted.
Timing

5.8.7 Utilities
When the Utilities item is selected, the screen shown below is displayed.

5.8.7.1 Pattern Enable (Channel A and B)

When checked, the selected output will become the pattern chosen by the Pattern Type
function.

5.8.7.2 Pattern Type

To choose the pattern for the Channel A or Channel B output, touch Select. The available
pattern types are:

100% Bars 75% Bars SMPTE Bars

Tartan Pluge Ramp

Sweep Pulse & Bar Burst

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 58 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.8.7.3 Freeze

To freeze the output, touch Select, and in the window dialog that appears, touch Frame
Freeze. To un-freeze the picture, touch Off.

5.8.7.4 Monochrome

When checked, the selected output will become a monochrome picture.

5.8.7.5 Cut to black

When selected, the corresponding output channel will cut to black.

5.8.7.6 Legalisation

Gamut legalisation ensures that both the HD and SD outputs of the unit meet specified color
limits. Touch Legalisation to enable or specify a legalisation selection.

RGB Legaliser Channel A & Channel B

Touch Select to specify a legalisation selection.

The available selections are


:

Off This selection disables gamut legalisation.

700mV RGB Lo 0mV, RGB Hi 700mV, will comply with area mask set to 1% or
greater.

721mV RGB Lo -21mV, RGB Hi 721mV, will comply with area mask set to 0%
or greater.

735mV RGB Lo -35mV, RGB Hi 735mV, will comply with area mask set 0% or
greater.

Area mask defines the percentage of total pixels in the image that may be out of gamut
without reporting that the signal has a RGB gamut error.

Note: The 735mV selection should be used in conjunction with the luma clipper (set at presets) to
generate images that adhere to EBU R103-200 specification.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 59 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

For more information about legalisation, see “Appendix C: RGB Legalizer and Luma Clipper”
on page 141.

Luma Clipper A & B

When luminance levels are too high or too low devices such as encoders and displays can
have problems. The luma clipper is used to limit signals above and below predefined limits.
Minimum and maximum limits can be set, in addition a knee allows for a graduated transition
to the limit.

Touch Luma Clipper A or Luma Clipper B to adjust luminance levels


.

Enable Select this option to enable the clipper.

White Max This sets up the upper limit (hard clip point) of the clipper. The range is
minimum 90% (852 digital 10-bit value) to maximum 109% (1019) with
increments of 1%. Preset is 103% (966).

White Knee This sets up the knee for the maximum white limit of the clipper. This
can be set up to give a “soft clip” from this knee point to the hard white
clip point. The range is minimum 60% (590) to maximum 109% (1019)
with increments of 1%. Preset is 100% (940).

Black Min This sets up the lower limit (hard clip point) of the clipper. The range is
minimum -7% (4) to maximum 10% (152) with increments of 1%.
Preset is -1% (55).

Black Knee This sets up the knee for the minimum black limit of the clipper. This
can be set up to give a “soft clip” from this knee point to the hard black
clip point. The range is minimum -7% (4) to maximum 60% (590) with
increments of 1%. Preset is 0% (64).

Note: Luma clipper preset values configure the clipper to meet luma limits as specified by EBU
R103-200.

To achieve a hard white clip set the White Max and White Knee to the same value. Similarly
to achieve a hard black clip set the Black Min and the Black knee to the same value.

For more information about the luma clipper, see “Appendix C: RGB Legalizer and Luma
Clipper” on page 141.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 60 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.9 Audio Menus


This section describes the Alchemist Ph.C-HD audio functions, which include the following
configuration settings and controls:

• Audio Display Tab: The Audio display tab shows audio input / output status/ Dolby
source and types and the Dolby program configuration. See “Audio Display Tab” on
page 63.

• Audio Control: The Audio Control page provides access to the main audio setup and
Dolby E configuration pages and allow the unit’s overall audio delay to be set. See
“Audio Control” on page 65.

• Dolby Decoder: The Dolby Decoder menu allows the Alchemist’s Dolby decoding
functions to be configured. See “Dolby Decoder” on page 68.

• Dolby Encoder: The Dolby Encoder menu allows the Alchemist’s Dolby encoding
functions to be configured. See “Dolby Encoder” on page 70.

• Audio Output: The Audio Output menus allow you to configure the unit’s Audio Out-
put settings. See “Audio Output” on page 73.

For additional information about the Alchemist Ph.C-HD’s audio processing and Dolby E
functions, see “Appendix E: Dolby E Authoring” on page 171.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 61 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.9.1 Audio Menu Hierarchy

Global Audio
Audio Tab
Delay Control

Audio Home

Input Pair Headphones Output Audio


Dolby Dolby
PCM/Data Routing/Gain Source Metadata
Decoder Encoder
Control Offset Selection

Decoder Encoder Encoder


Ip Alignment Emb A / Metadata Metadata
Source Source Mode
Control Emb B/AES Inputs Outputs
Selection Selection Selection

Internal Channel Ext 1


Metadata Aux Encoding Ip Ext 1 Full
Metadata Source Source
Status & Downmix Map Metadata
Authoring Select Selection
Snapshot Selection selection
& Snapshot
Ext 2
Channel Ext 2 Full
Source
Monitor Aux Gain Metadata
Encoder Selection
Decoded Downmix Op Alignment
Audio Delay
Channels on Program Control
Offset
AES Control Selection Channel
Delay

Encoder
Transcoding
Tones
Audio Delay Pair
Enable/
Offset Mono
Selection

Encoder Pair Mute


Encoder
Audio Gain
Mute
Offset

Tones

Metadata
Source
Map
Select

For additional information about the Alchemist Ph.C-HD’s audio processing and Dolby E
functions, see “Appendix E: Dolby E Authoring” on page 171.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 62 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.9.2 Audio Display Tab


The Audio display tab on the Home screen illustrates Audio Input / Audio Output status, Dolby
sources and types and the Dolby program configuration.

EMB In The EMB In indicators display the EMB input status.

• Green indicates that a valid embedded input signal is present.

• Red indicates that no embedded input signal is present.

AES In The AES In indicators display the AES input status.

• Green indicates that a valid AES input signal is present.

• Red indicates that no AES input signal is present.

Out Src These indicators display the audio output pair status.

• The text for each describes the selected source currently


routed to each output.

• Green indicates that the selected source is valid.

• Red indicates that the selected source is not valid.

Dolby 1 / This indicates the input source that is routed to the respective Dolby
Dolby 2 Source channel decoder.

• Green indicates a valid Dolby E or Dolby D signal

• Yellow indicates a valid PCM signal

• Red indicates that no Dolby E, Dolby D or PCM signal is pres-


ent.

Dolby 1 / This indicates the bitstream format that is being routed to the
Dolby 2 Source respective Dolby channel decoder.
Type
• Green indicates a valid Dolby E or Dolby D signal.

• Red indicates that there is no valid Dolby E or Dolby D signal.

• Yellow indicates a valid PCM signal.

Dolby 1 / This displays the Dolby program configuration being routed to the
Dolby 2 respective Dolby channel decoder.
Configuration

Audio Control These 'out of preset' status indicators warn the user when the
Status individual audio controls are adjusted from their preset values.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 63 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

Global Delay Use the slider to adjust the global audio delay. The offset value is
displayed in milliseconds.

Note: The delay is applied to all audio channels. Individual channel


delays will be added/subtracted from this delay.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 64 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.9.3 Audio Control


The Audio Control page is accessed by touching anywhere on the Audio tab.

The top level audio control menu presents a combination of general audio and Dolby
configuration. Each Dolby channel consists of a dedicated Dolby®E encoder and decoder
module. The availability of the control interface depends on the hardware installed.

Inputs Touch the toggle switch to enable Data mode.


PCM/DATA
• Green indicates that a valid input signal is present.

• Red indicates that no input signal is present.

Note: When the Dolby card is NOT installed inputs which have not
been routed to the output will remain grayed out.

Dolby Touch the Dolby Decoder 1 / Dolby Decoder 2 area on the screen to
Decoder 1 / access the Dolby Decoder setup page.
Dolby
Decoder 2

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 65 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

Dolby Touch Dolby Encoder area on the screen to access the Dolby
Encoder 1 / encoder setup page.
Dolby
Encoder 2 Note: When in transcode mode, a Transcoding indicator is shown at
the Audio control level.

Outputs Touch each of the audio output tabs to access the individual output
setup pages.
EMB A /
EMB B and AES can be configured to follow routing selections made
EMB B / on EMB A.
AES

Metadata Touch the Metadata area to access the External Metadata


configuration.

Note: This menu item is only present if 1080P option is installed


(RIO2X rear assembly).

Headphones Touch the Headphones button to access the Headphone Control


page.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 66 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.9.3.1 Headphone Control

A variety of headphone sources may be selected from embedded/AES inputs, decoded


outputs and embedded/AES outputs.

• Green indicates that a valid input signal is present.

• Red indicates that no input signal is present.

Note: Audio outputs are not colored.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 67 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.9.4 Dolby Decoder

Source Embedded/AES input pairs and Encoder outputs may be routed to


each decoder.

• Green indicates that a valid input signal is present.

• Red indicates that no input signal is present.

• Yellow (only present on ENC buttons) is a warning indication


that:

• The decoder is currently passing PCM not Dolby®E.

• In Dolby E authoring mode, the encoder does not have the


required audio channels to generate the selected program
configuration.

IP This displays the Dolby®E input alignment, which can be:


Alignment
• Advanced by one input frame.

• Co-timed with the video signal.

• Delayed by one input frame.

To change the input alignment, touch Select.

The input alignment needs to be selected based upon what devices are
upstream from the Alchemist.

Decoder This indicates the current Dolby Format, Program Configuration and bit
Metadata depth.

To view all the Metadata touch Full Metadata.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 68 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

Decoded metadata associated to each valid program may be viewed using the tabs.

Note: Alchemist only presents the programs that are available for the current Dolby program
configuration.

Eight Metadata Snapshots are available to store decoded Metadata and/or Authored
Metadata. Each Snapshot can store metadata from one program and may be applied to either
Dolby Encoder.

Touch Select to change the current Snapshot configuration. To capture the current Decoder
metadata, select the desired program and touch Store.

Decoded
Channels

Monitor The monitor function enables a predefined method of operation in


AES which decoded audio pairs are automatically assigned to AES outputs,
thus maintaining program configuration. This control overrides any
other mapping to the relevant 4 AES outputs.

Decoder 1 ‘Monitor on AES’ decodes to AES outputs 1 to 4.

Decoder 2 ‘Monitor on AES’ decodes to AES outputs 5 to 8.

Note: This monitoring feature bypasses internal routing/gain/delay. See


“Appendix E: Audio Block Diagram” on page 184.

Downmix This allows the user to specify the downmix mode available from the
Mode 5th Auxiliary output of the Dolby decoder.

Downmix This allows the users to specify which program the Downmix is
Program generated from.
Selection

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 69 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.9.5 Dolby Encoder

Encoder Touch the channel source selection menu item to assign inputs to the
Inputs encoder.

• Green indicates that a valid input signal is present.

• Red indicates that no input signal is present.

Note: The Dolby channel label dynamically updates when a different


program configuration is selected on the encoder.

Encoder Touch the Map buttons to quickly configure a pre-defined mapping to


Map Mode the encoder. These behave like a memory recall operation.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 70 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

Gain Touch Gain to adjust the audio gain.

The Gain controls allow gain to be applied to the individual channel


inputs to the encoder. The amount of gain applied to each channel is
displayed in dB.

The Track feature facilitates audio gain tracking across multiple


channels within the same Dolby program.

Touch Preset to return the gain to its preset value of 0dB.

Note: The selected channel will return to its default value. Other
channels configured to track this channel will maintain their relative
level.

If a program configuration is selected which doesn’t contain 8 channels


the redundant channels will be grayed out.

Delay Touch Delay to adjust the audio delay.

This allows a delay offset to be applied to the individual channel inputs


to the encoder and/or to the audio path when in Transcoding mode.
The value displayed reflects the offset applied on this control.

Note: The total audio delay will be displayed on the output Audio
Channel Control page.

OP This displays the Dolby®E output alignment, which can be:


Alignment
1. Advanced by one output frame.

2. Co-timed with the video signal.

3. Delayed by one output frame.

To change the output alignment, touch Select.

The output alignment needs to be selected based upon what devices


are downstream from the Alchemist.

Bit Depth Touch Bit Depth to specify 20 bit or 16 bit encoding. The default is 20
bit.

Note: This control is grayed out when in Transcode mode.

Program Touch Program Config to specify the desired encoding program


Config configuration. The default is 5.1+2.

Note: This control is grayed out when in Transcode mode.

Metadata Touch Metadata Source to specify the desired source of metadata to


Source the encoder.

Note: This control is only available if the 1080P option is installed and
Encoder Mode is set to Author. (In Transcode mode the metadata is
sourced directly from the decoder).

Metadata Touch Metadata Authoring to view all the metadata.


Authoring

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 71 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

This page indicates the current Encoder Metadata configuration. Encoded metadata
associated to each valid program can be viewed using the tabs.

Use the up/down arrows to select individual metadata parameters.

To change the current setting for the selected parameter, touch the Select button.

The current selection within the full metadata table is indicated by the yellow marker.

Eight Metadata Snapshots are available to store decoded Metadata and/or Authored
Metadata. Each Snapshot can store metadata from one program and may be applied to either
Dolby Encoder. The Snapshot may be renamed. See “Metadata Workflow” on page 181.

Touch Select to change the current Snapshot configuration. To capture the current encoder
metadata, select the desired program and touch Store.

To load a previously saved Snapshot into the currently selected Program touch Recall.

To preset all the metadata parameters for the current program touch Preset.

Mute When selected, all encoder input channels will be muted.

Tone The current Tone Type is indicated on the button. Touch the Tone
button to enable and change the Tone Type.

As well as the standard PCM tones a BLITS test tone is also available.
The BLITS type is can be configured within the system menu. See
“System Setup” on page 77.

Note: This Loop configuration applies to both encoders.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 72 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.9.6 Audio Output


These menus allow you to configure the unit’s Audio Output settings.

Outputs
EMB A
EMB B
AES

Touch each of the audio output tabs to access the individual output
setup pages.

Source Touch the source selection menu item to assign a source to the output
Selection audio pair.

• Green indicates that a valid input signal is present.

• Red indicates that no input signal is present.

• Yellow (only present on ENC buttons) is a warning indication


that the encoder is currently passing PCM not Dolby®E.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 73 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

Link To assign an audio pair, select the Link button.

Change To assign individual audio channels, select the Change button for the
relevant channel.

Source type and source selection can then be made.

When Link is enabled the two channels may be swapped using the
Swap button.

• Green indicates that a valid input signal is present.

• Red indicates that no input signal is present.

• Yellow (only present on ENC buttons) is a warning indication


that:

• The encoder is currently passing PCM not Dolby®E.

In Dolby E authoring mode, the encoder does not have the required
audio channels to generate the selected program configuration.

Gain (PCM) Touch the Gain button to setup the gain for each channel. Yellow
indicates the gain is currently set out of preset.

Gain may be applied to the individual channels of the PCM output pair.
The amount of gain applied to each channel is displayed in dB’s.

The Track feature facilitates audio gain tracking across both channels
within the same Dolby program.

Touch Preset to return the gain to its preset value of 0dB.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 74 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

Delay (PCM) Touch the Delay button to set up the delay for each channel.

The total delay* for each channel of the output pair is displayed.

If either channel has been adjusted out of preset the delay indicator will
be illuminated yellow.

To change the delay offset for the audio channel, use the slider bar.

* The total delay is the sum of:

System Delay + Dolby Input Alignment + Dolby Output Alignment +


Global Delay + Individual Channel Delay (configured here).

The values of the system delay vary according to the conversion being
made and are listed in “Appendix H: Latency Tables” on page 206.

Note: This PCM control will be grayed out when an encoder output is
selected.

Mono (PCM) Touch the Mono toggle button to take the average of the left and right
channels and apply that average to both.

Note: This PCM control cannot be enabled when an encoder output is


selected.

Mute (PCM) When selected both channels will be muted.

Note: This PCM control cannot be enabled when an encoder output is


selected.

Tone (PCM) The current Tone Type selection is indicated on the Tone button

Touch the Tone button to select a Tone Type.

Note: This PCM control will be grayed out when an encoder output is
selected.

Map 1–8 The map functions enable a predefined routing configuration.

EMB 1-8 assigns all 8 embedded inputs to each of its respective audio
outputs for the selected audio output (i.e. EMB A, EMB B or AES)

AES 1-8 assigns all 8 AES inputs to each of its respective audio
outputs for the selected audio output.

Map 1–4 DEC 1 assigns the 4 decoded outputs from decoder 1 to audio outputs
1–4 for the selected audio output.

DEC 2 assigns the 4 decoded outputs from decoder 2 to audio outputs


1–4 for the selected audio output.

Map 5–8 DEC 1 assigns the 4 decoded outputs from decoder 1 to audio outputs
5–8 for the selected audio output.

DEC 2 assigns the 4 decoded outputs from decoder 2 to audio outputs


5–8 for the selected audio output.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 75 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.9.7 External Metadata


External Dolby Metadata can be ingested into the Alchemist and output from the Alchemist
using the 4 dedicated 9-way D-types on the rear on the unit (2 x Input RS485, 2 x Output
RS485).

Note: These connections are only present if the unit is enabled with the 1080P option.

Touch External Metadata to access the External Metadata page.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 76 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

The External Metadata page consists of an Input and an Output pane


.

Input Touch Ext 1 / 2 Metadata to view the metadata present on the external
metadata inputs.

Output Touch Ext 1 / 2 Source to configure the metadata source for each
output.

5.9.8 System Setup

BLITS Loop

Select the System tab followed by the Config button to see the current
BLITS Loop selection.

Touch the Select button to select all phases on the BLITS tone or a
specific phase.

See “BLITS Test Generator” on page 188.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 77 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.10 Timecode
This section describes the Alchemist Ph.C-HD timecode functions, which include the
following displays, configuration settings and controls:

• Timecode Display: Timecode information is displayed on the Timecode tab in the


lower right of the Home screen. See “Timecode Display Tab” on page 79.

• Timecode I/O: Use these settings to setup input timecode sources and output time-
codes. See “Timecode Setup” on page 80.

• Timecode Control: Use these settings to specify timecode input triggers, output
loads, prerun times and the timecode mode. See “Timecode Control” on page 82.

Note: The Alchemist Ph.C Timecode functions are optional. If the Timecode option has not been
purchased, these functions are not available.

New screenshot required

For additional information about timecodes, see “Appendix B: Timecode” on page 124.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 78 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.10.1 Timecode Display Tab


The Timecode display tab on the Home screen displays the current input and output
timecodes, the selected timecode mode and synchro status of the unit, and provides access
to the Timecode Setup and Timecode Control menus.

Input This displays the current timecode from the specified timecode source.
Timecode

Output These fields display the timecodes currently being generated for
Timecode outputs A and B respectively.
A&B

DF/NDF These indicators show whether the corresponding timecode is a drop


frame or non-drop frame.

• When DF is illuminated, the timecode is drop frame.

• When NDF is illuminated, the timecode is non-drop frame.

When neither is illuminated, the principle of drop frame / non-drop


frame is not applicable.

Timecode This field displays the currently selected timecode mode.


Mode

Syncro This field displays the current status of timecode synchronization. For
Status example:

• Prerun indicates that the timecode is in the prerun phase pre-


ceding a synchro start event.

• Success indicates that the synchro start event has occurred


successfully.

Setup Touch the Setup button to access the Timecode Setup menu.

Control Touch the Control button to access the Timecode control menu.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 79 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.10.2 Timecode Setup


When Setup is selected, the screen shown below is displayed. The controls on this screen
allow timecode input sources and outputs to be configured.

5.10.2.1 Input Timecode Setup

SD Source These options specify the source of SD timecode input.

VITC: The SD input video timecode is read from the VITC signals.
(SMPTE 12M/SMPTE 266M)

LTC: The SD input video timecode is read from the Longitudinal


Timecode Connector (LTC).
(SMPTE 12M)

HD Source These options specify the source of the HD timecode input.


Emb VITC: The HD input video timecode is read from the embedded
VITC signals.
(SMPTE RP188)
EMB LTC: The HD input video timecode is read from the embedded LTC
signals.
(SMPTE RP 188)

LTC: The HD input video timecode is read from the LTC connector.
(SMPTE 12M)

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 80 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

Frame This option specifies the maximum frame number the input timecode will
Count reach before it resets to zero. This information is essential for timecode
arithmetic.
Detect: Measures the frame count max from the input timecode.
Format: Assumes that the timecode was generated to match the frame
rate of the video.

24/25/30: Forces the input frame count max to the specified setting.
This allows material that may have been generated with the wrong
frame count max limit (for example, slow PAL) to be accommodated.

5.10.2.2 Output Timecode Setup

Outputs A and B can be configured independently and have separate controls, allowing
different timecode values to be displayed. However, the Timecode mode is always common
to Output A and Output B.

Note: Both outputs will adopt the same configuration for Timecode Mode.

Frame These options specify the maximum number the output timecode frame
Count will reach before it resets to zero.
(Output
A & B) Auto: Assumes that the timecode is generated to match the specified
frame rate of the output video.

24/25/30: Forces the output frame count max to the specified setting.
This allows the user to pre-compensate for later changes in playback
speed, of the material generated by the Alchemist. Slow PAL for
example.

Drop Frame This setting is only relevant to 59.94Hz output.


Mode
(Output When enabled, the first two frame numbers (00 and 01) are omitted
A & B) from the count at the start of each minute, except minutes 00, 10, 20,
30, 40, and 50.

Note that if the Alchemist is configured to E-E timecode mode, and is


performing 30 fps – 30 fps timecode conversion, the output
drop/non-drop type follows the input. For example, 59.94Hz DF input
will automatically give a 59.94Hz DF output and vice versa.

On: Forces the output timecode to be drop frame. On can only be


selected if the output timecode is 30 fps.

Off: Forces the output timecode to be non-drop frame. Off can only be
selected if the output timecode is 30 fps.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 81 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

SD VITC This specifies, for an SD output, which line of vertical blanking the first
Insertion insertion of VITC signal occurs on. If enabled, the second insertion will
Line occur two lines below.

625 Default: Lines 19/332 and 21/334 (SMPTE 266M)

525 Default: Lines 14/277 and 16/279 (SMPTE 266M and RP164)

625 Range: Between lines 6/319 and 20/333


(SMTPE 12M and SMPTE 266M)

525 Range: Between lines 10/273 and 17/280


(SMPTE 12M and SMPTE 266M)

Note that the range refers to the first insertion line, not the second.

SD Activate This option enables/disables the timecode output format for SD output.
The options are VITC or Repeat

Note that the LTC via XLR is always enabled.

HD Activate This option enables/disables the timecode output format for HD output.
The options are Emb VITC or EMB LTC

Note that the LTC via XLR is always enabled.

5.10.3 Timecode Control


When Timecode Control is selected, the screen shown below is displayed:

5.10.3.1 Input Timecode

This displays the input timecode read from the specified source.

Drop Frame will be illuminated when a drop frame timecode is detected on the source
timecode.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 82 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.10.3.2 Timecode Entry

This option allows the desired timecode value to be entered. Preset values of 10h 00m 00s
00f and 01h 00m 00s 00f are available.

5.10.3.3 Input Trigger

The input trigger is the value of the source timecode that will cause an output timecode event
to occur.

To specify the timecode at which the trigger event will occur, do one of the following:

• Using the Timecode Entry keypad, enter a new timecode, and then touch the Set but-
ton next to the Input Trigger box.

• Touch the Input TC button next to the Input Trigger box. This sets the timecode to the
input timecode value.

5.10.3.4 Output A Load

This specifies the value that will be inserted in the output A timecode when the input trigger
event occurs.

To specify a new timecode value, do one of the following:

• Using the Timecode Entry keypad, enter a new timecode, and then touch the Set but-
ton next to the Output A Load box.

• Touch the Input TC button next to the Output A Load box. This sets the timecode to
the input timecode value.

5.10.3.5 Output B Load

This specifies the value that will be inserted in the Output B timecode when the input trigger
event occurs. This setting is independent of Output A; however, both outputs will adopt the
same Timecode Mode.

To specify a new timecode value, do one of the following:

• Using the Timecode Entry keypad, enter a new timecode, and then touch the Set but-
ton next to the Output B Load box.

• Touch the Input TC button next to the Output B Load box. This sets the timecode to
the input timecode value.

Note: The output LTC XLR connector will always deliver Output A timecode.

5.10.3.6 Prerun

This control is only used when performing a Synchro Prerun timecode conversion. It specifies
the amount of time before the input trigger that the user would like continuous timecode
output.

To specify a new prerun value, do one of the following:

• Using the Timecode Entry keypad, enter a new timecode, and then touch the Set but-
ton next to the Prerun box.

• Touch the Preset button next to the Prerun box. This sets the value to the default
value of 00h 03m 00s 00f.

5.10.3.7 Output A Timecode

This displays the current value of the timecode being generated for Output A, as specified by
the Timecode mode. If configured to be drop frame, the Drop Frame indicator is illuminated.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 83 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.10.3.8 Output B Timecode

This displays the current value of the timecode being generated for Output B, as specified by
the Timecode mode. If configured to be drop frame, the Drop Frame indicator is illuminated.

5.10.3.9 Timecode Mode

This control selects the timecode mode to be used by the Alchemist. For descriptions of each
mode, refer to “Appendix B: Timecode” on page 124.

The available timecode modes are:

• Synchro Auto

• Synchro Prerun

• Synchro Manual

• E-E

• E-E Regen

• Freerun

• Trigger Load

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 84 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.10.4 Timecode Control Warnings


The timecode displays for the Input Trigger, Output Loads, and Prerun change color to
indicate valid or invalid values.

Green Indicates that the value is valid, and that the corresponding event will
occur when the specified timecode is reached.

Yellow Indicates that the value is not currently valid, but if certain conditions,
such as the input standard or timecode type change, the corresponding
event may occur.

For example, if the Input Trigger timecode is set to occur on a frame


that does not exist in the current input standard, the value appears in
yellow. However; if before the Input Trigger timecode is reached, the
input standard changes to one in which the specified frame occurs, the
input trigger event will occur

Red The specified value is not valid, and will not be so under any
circumstances.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 85 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.11 FilmTools
This section describes the Alchemist Ph.C-HD FilmTools functions, which include the
following controls:

• Input Cadence: Use this menu to define the film cadence of the incoming content.
See “FilmTools Input” on page 88.

• Output Cadence: Use this menu to control the cadence of the converted content.
See “FilmTools Output” on page 91.

• Control: Use this menu to specify user-specified FilmTools control options. See
“FilmTools Control” on page 94.

• Detection: Use this menu to control the bias and internal detection algorithm. See
“FilmTools Detection” on page 95.

Note: The Alchemist Ph.C-HD FilmTools functions are optional. If the FilmTools option has not
been purchased, these functions are not available.

For more information, see “Appendix D: FilmTools” on page 144.

FilmTools

Input Output Control Detection

FilmTools must be enabled in the Conversion menu.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 86 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.11.1 Enabling FilmTools


The FilmTools option is enabled and disabled from the Conversion menu.

5.11.2 FimTools Display Tab


The FilmTools display tab on the Home screen displays the FilmTools controls.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 87 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.11.3 FilmTools Input


The Input Cadence menu allows the user to define a film cadence for the incoming content. A
single continuous and perfect cadence can be defined flawlessly by its relationship to
timecode, or by aligning an internal free-running cadence generator. If the content contains
discontinuous or mixed cadence, or if the cadence is unknown before conversion, the Detect
mode performs real-time analysis to assign cadence.

To select the Cadence Mode, in the Cadence Control section, touch the Select button.
Then, from the Select Cadence Mode dialog, choose the required cadence.

5.11.3.1 Auto
Cadence is defined by the internal sequence detector unless a PsF input standard has been
selected, in which case perfect frame segmentation is assumed (i.e. 2:2 F1/2).

This is the default selection.

5.11.3.2 Detect

Cadence is defined by the internal sequence detector (even when PsF inputs are selected).

5.11.3.3 1:1

Incoming content is interpreted as 1:1 cadence (field by field or frame by frame motion).

5.11.3.4 2:2 F1/2 (PsF)


All incoming content is interpreted as 2:2 F1/2 (PsF) cadence.

5.11.3.5 2:2 F2/1

All incoming content is interpreted as 2:2 F2/1 cadence.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 88 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.11.3.6 2:3 TC Datum

Incoming content is interpreted as continuous 2:3 cadence derived from continuous input
timecode by identifying the specific 2:3 frame type and timecode of an input 'Datum' frame

For more information, see “Appendix D: FilmTools” on page 144.

New screenshot required

2:3 Datum Cadence

This control defines the 2:3 cadence of the Datum frame when the input cadence control is
2:3 TC Datum mode. For more information, see “Understanding 2:3 Datum Cadence” on
page 165.

2:3 Cadence reset

On Valid TC Input 2:3 cadence will be defined according to the 2:3 Datum Cadence
(Default) and Timecode controls when stable input timecode has been detected.
The input timecode may be greater or less than specified 2:3 Datum
Timecode.

At Datum Input 2:3 cadence will be defined according to the 2:3 Datum Cadence
and Timecode controls. The cadence reset occurs when the input
timecode is equal to the 2:3 Datum Timecode.

2:3 Datum Timecode

Input (Default) The 2:3 Datum Timecode is automatically set to match the
Timecode timecode “Input Trigger” value.
Trigger
(Default)

Independent The 2:3 Datum Timecode can be set to any required frame.
Cadence
Trigger

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 89 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

2:3 Max time pre-datum

0–23 hours (Default) The 2:3 Datum Timecode is automatically set to match the
timecode “Input Trigger” value.
(Default 12
hours)

5.11.3.7 2:3 TC 0 and 5

Incoming content is interpreted as continuous 2:3 cadence defined by a specific relationship


to the frame count of non-drop frame input timecode

0 and 5 Cadence

This control defines the phase of the relationship between frame count and input timecode.
When frame count values of 0 and 5 are present, the 2:3 cadence is interpreted as the
selected frame type.

For more information, see “Understanding 2:3 Datum Cadence” on page 165.

5.11.3.8 2:3 Freerun

Incoming content is interpreted as continuous 2:3 cadence derived from an internal


free-running 2:3 cadence generator.

Cadence Offset

This control enables the cadence of the free-running 2:3 cadence generator to be offset.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 90 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.11.4 FilmTools Output


The FilmTools Output Cadence Control menu enables the user to control the cadence of the
converted content. This menu allows the user to select the required cadence including any
required relationship with the output timecode.

5.11.4.1 Off

No specific cadence will be forced. Outgoing content will follow the Input (field by field or
frame by frame motion).

5.11.4.2 2:2 F1/2 (PsF)

Outgoing content is generated with 2:2 F1/2 (PsF) cadence.

5.11.4.3 2:2 F2/1

Outgoing content is generated with 2:2 F2/1 cadence.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 91 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.11.4.4 2:3 TC Datum

Outgoing content is generated with 2:2 F2/1 cadence.

Outgoing content is generated with continuous 2:3 cadence derived from continuous output
timecode by identifying the specific 2:3 frame type and timecode of an output ‘Datum’ frame.

2:3 Datum Cadence

This control defines the 2:3 cadence of the Datum frame when the input cadence control is
2:3 TC Datum mode.

2:3 Cadence reset

On Valid TC Output 2:3 cadence will be defined according to the 2:3 Datum
Cadence and Timecode controls when stable output timecode has
(Default) been detected. The output timecode may be greater or less than
specified 2:3 Datum Timecode.

At Datum Output 2:3 cadence will be defined according to the 2:3 Datum
Cadence and Timecode controls. The cadence reset occurs when
output timecode is equal to the 2:3 Datum Timecode.

2:3 Datum Timecode

Output The 2:3 Datum Timecode is automatically set to match the “Output A
Load A Load” timecode.
Timecode
(Default)

Independent The 2:3 Datum Timecode can be set to any required frame.
Cadence
Trigger

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 92 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

Max time pre-datum

This control defines the start of the Cadence Window. It is only applicable when 2:3 Cadence
Reset is set to “on valid TC”. The default value is 12 hours.

5.11.4.5 TC 0 and 5

Outgoing content is generated with continuous 2:3 cadence defined by a specific relationship
to the frame count of non-drop frame output timecode.

0 and 5 Cadence

This control defines the phase of the relationship between frame count and output timecode.
When frame count values of 0 and 5 are present, the 2:3 cadence is interpreted as the
selected frame type.

5.11.4.6 2:3 Freerun

Outgoing content is generated with continuous 2:3 cadence derived from an internal
free-running 2:3 cadence generator.

Cadence Offset

This control enables the cadence of the free-running 2:3 cadence generator to be offset.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 93 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.11.5 FilmTools Control


The FilmTools Control menu enables the FilmTools Mode and Film Aperture settings to be
specified.

5.11.5.1 Mode

Auto Selects between synchronized, interpolated (linear) and MC


(Default) interpolated (motion compensated interpolation) conversion as
appropriate depending on the input and output formats specified. See
“Conversion Tables” on page 161. Interpolation gives the smoothest
motion profile. Synchronize disables temporal interpolation and
maintains clean frames.

Note: Synchronize mode can cause field/frame drops or repeats


depending on the input and output frequencies selected.

Synchronize Forces the conversion by synchronization.

Interpolate Forces the conversion by linear interpolation.

MC Forces the conversion by motion compensated interpolation.


Interpolate

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 94 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.11.5.2 Film Aperture

Normal This aperture maximizes the vertical resolution from the incoming film
(Default) material. This is the optimum aperture for most applications.

Sharp This aperture maintains maximum possible vertical resolution with the
result that it is less tolerant to film sequence detection errors

Safe This aperture is film safe. It is the most tolerant to film sequence
detection errors. Note this mode is useful in applications where the film
content contains mixed cadence regions

5.11.5.3 Video to film blur

Video to film blur allows any video-to-film conversion to have controlled blur added in areas of
movement. Using Ph.C, this process ensures that the amount of blur is proportional to the
speed and direction of the motion so that fast moving objects will be blurred more than the
slower ones. This mimics the blur usually associated with production on 35mm film.

Blur Enable Select this option to enable film blur.

Blur Use the slider bar to adjust the blur strength from 0 (min) to 8 (max).
Strength

5.11.6 FilmTools Detection


The FilmTools Detection menu controls the internal sequence detection algorithm.

The Alchemist utilizes a complex integrated detection algorithm to identify content type and
cadence information. This algorithm has been optimized so that the maximum possible range
of material can be converted in a single pass. In some rare cases it may be desirable to bias
the algorithm using the following controls.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 95 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.11.6.1 Video Enable

On (Default) Allows the sequence detector to positively identify content as 1:1


(video).

Off The sequence detector will never identify content as video.

5.11.6.2 Film Enable

Any (Default) Allows the sequence detector to identify film of any cadence.
This may be 2:2, 2:3, discontinuous 2:3, orphan fields, varispeed or
animation.

2:2 Forces the sequence detection to identify film content as 2:2 cadence
only. Content may be F1/2 or F2/1.

2:3 Forces the sequence detection to identify film content as 2:3 cadence
only. The 2:3 cadence may be discontinuous.

Animation Optimized sequence detection algorithm specifically for animation.

Off The sequence detector will not identify content as film.

5.11.6.3 Bias

Normal This is the optimum setting for most applications. The detection
(Default) algorithms have been optimized to give the most accurate results for
the greatest possible range of material.

Video 2 In some rare cases in may be desirable to bias the sequence detector
Video 1 such that it is more likely to detect video or more likely to detect film.
Film 1 Video 2 biases more strongly towards video than Video 1. Similarly
Film 2 Film 2 biases more strongly towards film than Film 1.

5.11.6.4 Window Control

This control allows the sequence and cut detection to be restricted to specific areas of the
image. A typical detection application would be to avoid sequence detection errors caused by
artifacts near the images edges. A typical cut detection application would be to prevent the
detection of cuts occurring within a specific region of the image.

Auto The sequence/cut detection region will be set to default values.


(Default)

Track Input The sequence/cut detection region will track with the settings for input
Blanking blanking.

User The user may manually define a specific sequence/cut detection


region.

5.11.6.5 Window Overlay

Off The sequence/cut detection region overlay is disabled.


(Darken)

Darken The active sequence/cut detection region is shown with reduced


luminance.

Grayed The active sequence/cut detection region is shown in mono.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 96 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.11.6.6 User Window

Left Defines the left edge of the detection region as a percentage of the
picture width.
0–100%

(Default 1%)

Right Defines the right edge of the detection region as a percentage of the
picture width.
0–100%

(Default
99%)

Top Defines the top edge of the detection region as a percentage of the
picture height.
0–100%

(Default 1%)

Bottom Defines the bottom edge of the detection region as a percentage of the
picture height.
0–100%

(Default
99%)

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 97 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.12 VANC
This section describes the control interface of the Alchemist Ph.C-HD vertical ancillary bypass
mode.

5.12.1 VANC Display Tab

1 to 8 These toggle buttons allow the user to select whether status


information for packets 1 to 8 or 9 to 16 is viewed.
9 to 16

Edit Touch Edit to access the VANC configuration page.

Status
Disabled
Disabled indicates the VANC bypass feature for the specified data
packet is currently disabled.

Status
Green (OK)
Green indicates a packet with the specified identification value has
been successfully detected and inserted into the specified output line.
All packets will be transparently bypassed from input to output.

Status
Yellow
(Warning) Yellow indicates a packet with the specified identification value has
been successfully detected and inserted into the specified output line,
however due to the combination of input / output standards selected
VANC packets might be dropped or repeated.

Note: Packets are dropped/repeated in sympathy with video


fields/frames.

Status Red
(Error)
Red indicates the user specified identification value has not been
detected and therefore will not be inserted.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 98 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.12.2 VANC Menu Hierarchy

View 1 to 8 VANC Tab Output A Output B


View 9 to 16

VANC Edit
VANC Output VANC Output
Packet Select Enable Enable
(Tabs 1 to 16)

F ormat
DID S-DID Follow Input
Select Tab

Output
Line A

Output
Line B

Output A
Enable

Output B
Enable

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 99 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.12.3 VANC Control


The VANC control page offers configuration for each of the 16 data packets. Individual
packets may be selected using the tabs. In addition to these controls VANC must be enabled
on the output page before data can be successfully bypassed.

Packet Select the desired packet using the tabs.


Selection

DID Touch the slider to set the DID hex value. Alternatively touch the
numeric value and a hex keypad is available to enter the desired
identification value.

SDID Touch the slider to set the S-DID hex value. Alternatively touch the
numeric value and a hex keypad is available to enter the desired
identification value.

Follow Input Touch Follow Input to insert the data on the same line as it was
extracted on. This feature is only applicable when the input and output
image formats are the same e.g. 1080i to 1080i.

In this mode the Alchemist will track data packets, even if the input
packets are present on different lines in different fields (assuming they
are within the valid range). This is the only mode the Alchemist will
effectively insert data into different line positions in different fields.

If selected when IO formats are different Alchemist will default to insert


on the line number specified in the user interface. Default is the
minimum line specified in the available range.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 100 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

Output Select the desired output format configuration using the tabs. This
Selection allows the user to configure independently the five different output
formats (525, 625, 720P, 1080i, 1080P).

Output A Touch the slider to set the Output A insertion line number. Alternatively
Line touch the numeric value and a decimal keypad is available to enter the
desired line number.

Output A Touch Enable to activate packet insertion on Output A.


Enable

Output B Touch the slider to set the Output B insertion line number. Alternatively
Line touch the numeric value and a decimal keypad is available to enter the
desired line number.

Output B Touch Enable to activate packet insertion on Output B.


Enable

Note: VANC must be enabled on the output page before data can be successfully bypassed. See
“VANC Output” on page 54.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 101 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.13 Closed Captions


This section describes the control interface of the Alchemist Ph.C-HD Closed Captions mode.

5.13.1 C-Captions Display Tab


The C-Captions (Closed Captions) display tab on the Home screen illustrates at a glance the
current 608/708 input status and output configuration.

Input The Input column displays the input caption status.

608 (21) Green (Present) indicates that a valid 608/708 signal is


608 (284) present.
708
Red (Missing) indicates the input 608/708 caption is
missing.

Grey (Not Valid) indicates that the 608 caption data is not
valid for the current input standard selected.

Red (Error) indicates that the input 708 caption is invalid.


Invalid conditions include a sequence count mis-match,
checksum error or some other error in the packet.

Output A/B The Output A/B column informs the user whether each output caption
(608/708) is currently being successfully passed (in the current mode of
608 (21) operation).
608 (284)
708 The caption is being successfully passed and is currently
inserted into the specified output line.

Note that 608 can only be inserted onto lines 21 and 284.

The caption is NOT currently being passed. The input


caption is missing and therefore cannot be inserted.

Source The Source column indicates the source of each output caption type
(608/708).
608 (21)
608 (284) The specified 608 source caption is NOT present.

608 output caption is sourced from the 608 input.

608 output caption is sourced from 708 CB (compatibility


bytes).

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 102 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

708 708 output captions are sourced from both the 608 and
708 input. The compatibility bytes are sourced from the
608 and the Native 708 is source from the 708 input.

All 708 output captions (Native and compatibility bytes)


are sourced from the 708 input.

Edit Touch Edit to access the Closed Captions configuration page.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 103 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.13.2 Closed Caption Control


The Closed Caption control page offers configuration for CEA608 and CEA708 passing
functionality. In addition to these controls the Closed Captions must be enabled on the output
page before captions can be successfully passed.

525 Input This allows line 21/284 to be blanked once the 608 caption data has
Setup been extracted. This prevents the caption data creeping into the image
processing apertures.

Note: Only applicable to 525 59i inputs.

Line 21 Auto: If 608 is detected the Alchemist will extract the caption data and
Blanking then blank line 21/284.

On: Forces line 21/284 to be blanked even when a caption is not


present.

Off: Line 21/284 will never be blanked.

525 Input Use this to control of the source of the outgoing 608 captions.
Setup
Note: Only applicable to 525 59i inputs.

608 Source Auto: The Alchemist will automatically detect the presence of line 21 or
708 compatibility bytes. If both are both present Line 21 takes priority.

Line 21: Forces the 608 source to Line 21/284.

708 CB: Forces the 608 source to 708 CB.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 104 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

Format tabs Select the desired output format configuration using the tabs.

This allows the user to configure independently the five different output
formats (525, 625,720P, 1080i, 1080P).

Enable Touch Enable Line 21 to enable/disable the insertion of 525 608 Line
21 output captions.
Line 21
Note: Only present on 525 tab

Enable Touch Enable Line 284 to enable/disable the insertion of 525 608 Line
284 output captions.
Line 284
Note: Only present on 525 tab

Enable 708 Touch Enable Line 284 to enable/disable the insertion of 525 608 Line
284 output captions.

Note: Only present on 525 tab

Enable 708 Touch Enable 708 to enable/disable the insertion of 708 captions.

708 Line Touch the slider to select the 708 output insertion line number.

Alternatively touch the numeric value and a decimal keypad is available


to enter the desired line number.

5.13.3 Closed Captions Output Enabled/Disabled

C-Captions Closed Captions Output can be enabled/disabled independently for


Output output A and output B.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 105 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.14 System Functions


This section describes the Alchemist Ph.C-HD system functions, which include the following
configuration settings and controls:

• RollCall: Use these settings to specify the Alchemist Ph.C’s RollCall information, set
up RollTracks, and specify what information should be logged. See “RollCall” on
page 108.

• Ethernet: Use the Ethernet controls to specify whether the unit receives its IP
address dynamically or, if it does not, to specify the unit’s IP address. See “Ethernet”
on page 112.

• Panel Controls: Use these settings to calibrate to touch screen, temporarily


de-activate the touch screen so that it can be cleaned, and specify panel timeout
settings. See “Panel Controls” on page 117.

• Setup: Use these settings to enable or disable shaped horizontal blanking, active line
length type, and analog blanking. See “Debug” on page 118.

• Info: The system information screen displays version information about the Alchemist
Ph.C. See “Debug” on page 118.

• Debug: Use the Tools menu to access the Timecode Overlays screen, and the
Diagnostics screen to perform diagnostic tests on the Alchemist Ph.C.See “Panel
Controls” on page 117.

• SNMP: Use these setting to configure the Alchemist’s SNMP settings. See “Appendix
F: SNMP” on page 192.

System

Panel
RollCall Debug Setup Info SNMP Ethernet
Controls

Tools Diagnostics Physical Interface Traps

Timecode
Overlays

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 106 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.14.1 System Tab


The Alchemist’s system configuration functions are accessed from the System page

5.14.1.1 Messages

The Messages area on the System tab can display the following messages about the state of
the Alchemist Ph.C HD:

Booting The unit is starting up.

System OK The unit is functioning normally.

Fan Fail The main cooling fan, at the rear of the unit, has failed. This condition
may cause the unit to overheat.

Diagnostics One of the diagnostic tests, available on the Diagnostics screen is


Active currently running.

System The unit’s temperature is higher than recommended. If the temperature


Overheating continues to rise, the unit will shut down critical cards and the display
screen will go blank. However, the fans will continue running to cool the
unit. After the unit has cooled sufficiently, it may be restarted.

PSU Fault A problem has been detected with one of the power supply units.

Note that on units fitted with two power supplies, if one supply is turned
on but the other is not, a PSU fault will be reported.

Version The combination of components comprising the Alchemist Ph.C. is not


Unknown recognized.

If there is more than one message to be displayed, the display will cycle through them
continuously.

In addition, the current total system delay is displayed as well as the status indicators for:

• RollCall

• Fan operation

• PSU

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 107 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.14.2 Info
When Info is selected, the System Information screen shown below is displayed.

The System Information Screen displays information about the Alchemist Ph.C HD’s software
and hardware versions. This information is required when contacting Snell support.

System Information screen for unit with High Definition, Dolby E, FilmTools, and Timecode
options:

5.14.3 Communications
The Communications menu provides access to the Alchemist’s RollCall, Ethernet and SNMP
menus.

5.14.4 RollCall
These controls allow information to be sent, via the RollCall™ network, to other compatible
units connected on the same network.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 108 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.14.4.1 Unit ID

This item allows the address of the unit to be set.

To change the ID, do one of the following:

• Use the scroll bars to scroll through the list of addresses (in Hex). The range is from
10 to FF.

• Select the ID box, use the keypad to enter the new address and then select OK.

5.14.4.2 Name

This allows the name of the unit as it appears on the RollCall network, to be changed.

To change the name select the Edit item and use the keyboard to edit the text. Select OK to
enable the new name.

5.14.4.3 Log Server name

This allows the name of the Logging server on the RollCall network, to be changed in a similar
manner to that described above.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 109 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.14.4.4 RollTracks

When RollTracks is selected, the screen shown below is displayed:

The RollTrack function allows the Alchemist to automatically control remote audio delay
modules using the RollCall system.

As the delay through the Alchemist varies according to the conversion mode, delay modules
connected via the RollTrack system will automatically have their delay updated to match.

The delay sent out via the RollTrack system matches the internal audio delay of the
Alchemist.

For more detailed information, see “Appendix I: RollTrack Audio Delay Tracking” on
page 216.

The destination for the delay information is set from the RollTrack address as follows:

Up to 2 audio delays may be selected as a destination. Selecting either of the two Address
edit buttons produces an address editing keyboard.

The string characteristics of a RollCall address are:

0000:00:00*0 The first set of digits identifies the network address, in hexadecimal.
This is usually 0000.

0000:00:00*0 The second set of digits identifies the enclosure address, in


hexadecimal.

0000:00:00*0 The third set of digits identifies the slot address of the delay module, in
hexadecimal.

0000:00:00*0 The last set of digits identifies the unit ID, in decimal.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 110 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

A more detailed description of these items is given in “Appendix I: RollTrack Audio Delay
Tracking” on page 216.

In a typical set-up, the network address will be 0000, the enclosure and slot address would
match those of the destination module, and the unit ID should be set to the RollCall ID of the
destination unit.

The Alchemist RollTrack output becomes active as soon as the enclosure address is set to be
non zero and OK selected.

RollTrack 1/ Enables or disables the corresponding RollTrack.


RollTrack 2
On / Off

Audio Delay Specifies the channel number, which can be 14, 15, 16, or 17.
Channel

RollTrack 1 Touch Edit to change the RollTrack Address as described previously.


Address/ The preset value is 0000:00:00*0.
RollTrack 2
Address

5.14.4.5 Log Items

When Log Items is selected, the screen shown below is displayed


.

This screen reveals a list of items that can be made available for logging.

Input Status When checked, a loss of input signal condition will be indicated to the
logging device.

Input When checked, the current input standard will be available to the
Standard logging device.

Reference When checked, a loss of reference signal condition will be indicated to


Status the logging device.

Output When checked, the current output standard will be available to the
Standard logging device.
A&B

System When checked, system status log events will be available to the logging
Status device.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 111 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.14.5 Ethernet
The Alchemist Ph.C can connect to a RollCall 32-bit control panel via an Ethernet connection.
The unit’s IP address can either be dynamically assigned by a DHCP server, or manually
assigned.

Use the Ethernet controls to specify whether the unit receives its IP dynamically (using
DHCP) or, if it does not, to specify the unit’s IP address.

DHCP To use a dynamically assigned IP address, in the DHCP section, select


Enable. The Alchemist Ph.C - HD will receive its IP address from a
DHCP server, and its address will be displayed in the Current Address
information display. If a DHCP server is not available, the IP address
will revert to the default IP address.

Address The default address can be changed by manually assigning an IP


address. To do this, in the DHCP section, touch Disable, then in the
address section, touch Edit. Use the keyboard to enter the IP address,
and then touch OK. The factory state for the default IP address is
192.168.151.1.

Netmask This allows the Subnet Mask to be entered. The default address is
255.255.255.0.

Gateway This allows the Gateway address to be entered. The default address is
0.0.0.0.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 112 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.14.6 SNMP
On the main SNMP page, you can configure and enable up to four SNMP traps.

Note: For more information about the Alchemist’s SNMP functions, see “Appendix F: SNMP” on
page 192.

Each SNMP trap is configured on its own tab. For each trap, specify the following information:

Trap Enable Trap 1 destination.


Enable

Trap IP Configures the IP address to which traps (notifications) are sent. This
Address address should correspond to the IP address of the SNMP Manager.

Trap UDP Configures the destination UDP port for traps. The manager should be
Port configured to ‘listen’ for traps on this port. The SNMP default is 162 but
other port numbers may be used.

Trap Configures the trap community string.


Community

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 113 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.14.6.1 SNMP > Physical

The settings on the SNMP > Physical page allow the Alchemist’s SNMP functions to be
enabled or disabled and the UDP Port to be used for SNMP communication to be specified.
This page also provides an option to resend all SNMP traps to the SNMP manager.

Enable This enables or disables the SNMP agent within the Alchemist. Default
SNMP is disabled.

Resend All When pressed the Alchemist will resend all current traps/notifications.
Traps

UDP Port This indicates/configures the UDP port that the Alchemist listens on for
SNMP messages from a manager. The SNMP default is 161 but other
ports may be used.

Name Click edit to change unit’s physical name, used for SNMP purposes.
The default name is ‘Alchemist PhC HD’.

5.14.6.2 SNMP > Interface

The settings on the SNMP > Interface page configure the Alchemist’s SNMP interface.

Read Configures the SNMP read community value. Default is ‘public’.


Community

Write Configures the SNMP write community value. Default is ‘private’.


Community

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 114 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

Contact Configures the contact email address for Alchemist SNMP agent.
email

Physical Configures the physical location of the Alchemist


Location

5.14.6.3 Where Can I Find the MIBs?

The MIBs are stored locally on the Alchemist or can be found on the Snell FTP site.

Simply connect the Alchemist to your network, open an internet browser (IE 7 recommended)
and enter the current IP address (see system > Ethernet > IP address).

This will show the Alchemist home page. At the top of the home screen select the
‘SNMP MIBs’ logo to extract a zip file containing the required MIBs. Save these locally for use
with your chosen SNMP application.

5.14.6.4 Validated SNMP Applications

The Alchemist’s SNMP Agent has been explicitly validated with the following SNMP
applications:

• iReasoning (Pro & Enterprise versions)

• Castle Rock SNMPc Manager

• MGSoft

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 115 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.14.7 Setup
When Setup is selected, the screen shown below is displayed.

From the Setup screen, the following parameters can be configured:

• Shaped Horizontal Blanking

• Active Line Length

• Analog Blanking

• Auto AES re-align

As well, the Panel Controls and Debug menus can be accessed.

5.14.7.1 Shaped Horizontal Blanking

When enabled, this option provides a blanking rise and fall time of 3 pixels (approximately
10% to 90%).

5.14.7.2 Active Line Length

When Analog is selected, the unit treats input 4:3 images as if they originated as analog
signals. This enables the unit to compensate for analog line length differences between
analog PAL and NTSC signals and preserve correct aspect ratio.

5.14.7.3 Analog Blanking

If Analog Active Line Length has been selected, this option applies appropriate analog
blanking to both input and output signals.

5.14.7.4 Audio Alignment

This allows the user to enable or disable the auto AES re-align feature.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 116 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

When in Automatic mode, if a new AES input is applied to the Alchemist and that AES
channel is routed to one of the audio outputs, all AES channels will be reset to re-align them.

Touch Align Audio Now to manually trigger a reset to all AES channels.

5.14.7.5 Minimum Delay

If the FilmTools option is enabled, this control has no effect.

If the FilmTools option is disabled, when this control is Off, the latency through the Alchemist
is approximately 220-336ms. This matches the latency of the unit with FilmTools enabled.

If a reduced latency is required, enabling this control reduces latency to approximately


135-205ms.

5.14.8 Panel Controls


When Panel Controls is selected, the screen shown below is displayed.

5.14.8.1 Calibrate

This function allows re-calibration of the touch screen.

Press on the cursor area for a few seconds and the next screen will appear.

The calibration process will be completed when the Calibration Successful dialog appears on
the screen as shown below.

Touch the screen anywhere to return to the System screen.

5.14.8.2 Clean

This allows the screen to be cleaned without activating any functions.

When the Clean function is enabled a representation of a countdown timer will appear on the
screen. This timer will be reset to zero whenever the screen is touched during the cleaning
process and will run for approximately 16 seconds after the last time the screen was touched;
it will then return to the System screen.

5.14.8.3 Panel Timeout

If the touch screen has not been used for a certain period of time it will be come inoperative. If
an attempt is made to operate the screen a dialog box will appear warning that the panel has
been locked due to a timeout. Select Unlock to return to normal operation or Cancel to leave
in the locked condition.

The period of time before the panel becomes locked can be set using the Panel Timeout
control.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 117 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

The time can be set from 1 to 30 minutes using the scroll bar or the keypad.

By setting the control to less than 1 minute the function will be turned off.

5.14.8.4 Dim

When selected the brightness of the panel will reduce to a minimum when the panel timeout
occurs.

5.14.9 Debug
The Debug menu provides access to the Tools options and the Diagnostics screen.

The Tools menu allows Timecode overlays to be shown on the output display, and the
Diagnostics screen provides options that can be used to determine the source of potential
system problems.

5.14.10 Tools (Timecode Overlays)


The only option currently available on the Tools menu is the Timecode Overlays screen.

These options allow overlays, displaying any or all of the Input Timecode, Output A
Timecode, and Output B Timecode to be displayed on the output.

To display any of the above, select the corresponding check box.

Note: The input timecode overlay is applied in input space; therefore, it is processed before being
displayed.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 118 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.14.11 Diagnostics
When Diagnostics is selected, the screen shown below is displayed.

The diagram at the top of the Diagnostics screen enables Snell support to determine the
source of potential system problems; it should not be used unless instructed to do so by Snell
support.

The Autotest functions enable the cards within the Alchemist Ph.C HD to perform self-tests.

To perform a test on a card, press the corresponding Autotest button, a Running message
will display, followed by a percentage indicating the progress of the test, until the test has
completed when it will return a Pass or ‘Failure’ message.

Note: The Alchemist Ph.C must be receiving a valid input signal before performing any autotests.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 119 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Operation Using the Touch Screen

5.14.12 Memory
This function allows a number of particular setups of the unit to be saved and recalled. There
are six user memory locations available plus default. All memories locations may renamed
except the default position.

To change the memory name select the memory location (color will change to green) and
then select Edit. This will reveal the keyboard and allow text to be entered. Select OK to save
this new name and return to the Memory screen.

Memory Select

To Save a Current Setup in a Memory Location:

1. Select the memory location (color will change to green)

2. Select Store.

To Recall a Setup from a Memory Location:

1. Select the memory location (color will change to green)

2. Select Recall.

3. Click Factory to return all of the unit’s settings to their default settings. This selection
will delete all user memories.

4. Click Default to reset all of the unit’s settings to their defaults, leaving all user memo-
ries intact.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 120 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Noise Reduction

Appendix A. Noise Reduction

A.1 Overview
The noise reducer is an advanced adaptive spatial/temporal filter which has been optimized
to preserve detail without introducing artifacts.

Pixel based adaption is achieved through careful analysis of the image to distinguish which
pixels are moving and which are static. Static and low textured regions are better handled by
the temporal processing as it permits the reduction of noise without any loss of resolution,
whilst moving textured regions are better handled by the spatial processing as temporal
processing may introduce smear.

The noise reducer is designed to remove low level noise such as noise generated by high
levels of camera gain or “film grain” like noise.

A.2 Noise Reducer Controls


The noise reducer allows the following adjustments to be made.

Noise On / Off
Reducer
Preset to Off.

Luma 0 to 30 units in increments of 1 unit.


Strength
Preset to 0.

Chroma 0 to 30 units in increments of 1 unit.


Strength
Preset to 0.

Weighting White

Uniform

Black

Bias ±7 units in increments of 1 unit.

Preset to 0.

Overlay On / Off

Preset to Off.

A.3 Setup

A.3.1 Basic Operation


Enable the filter and then experiment with various luma and chroma strengths. Optimum
setup will offer clean images with minimal artifacts. Typical artifacts caused by excessive
noise reduction can include loss of detail or in the extreme case smearing. In the first instance
it is recommended the Bias is left in preset. If the source material is particularly biased
towards black or white it may be desirable to adjust the weight to suit.

A.3.2 Advanced Setup and Operation


If the strength control doesn’t offer the desired results, with demanding material it may be
necessary to fine tune the bias control. With the overlay enabled, if you see moving regions
which have little or no color on and around them, then reduce the bias. Alternatively, if the

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 121 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Noise Reduction

static regions have some color, then increase the bias. Once the bias has been configured the
user should adjust the strength controls to compliment the new bias level. Optimum noise
reduction is now in progress!

The following example shows how to use the overlay to achieve the optimum setting for the
noise reducer. Three different scenarios show how to adjust the bias control using the
overlay; in this example the background is static with foreground motion (the penguins).

A.3.2.1 Scenario 1 – Too much bias

In the above image it can be seen that the moving regions (penguins) do not have enough
color overlay on them. In this example the bias has been set too high. Some of the moving
content may suffer from smearing (on higher strength levels) as a direct result of using the
temporal processing.

A.3.2.2 Scenario 2 – Too little bias

In scenario 2 however, the majority of the static region has the color overlay present. This
means the bias has been set too low. As some static regions are being spatially processed in
this instant the noise reducer probably isn’t generating the most optimal result.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 122 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Noise Reduction

A.3.2.3 Scenario 3 – Optimum bias

Scenario 3 shows the optimum setup. All moving regions are being spatially processed, and
majority of static regions are being temporally processed. This configuration will offer the
optimum noise reduction.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 123 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Timecode

Appendix B. Timecode

B.1 Overview
The ability to seamlessly handle timecode while performing a frame-rate conversion is
available with the Timecode option for Alchemist Ph.C-HD. The Alchemist has the ability to
monitor its input timecode and act upon it in a variety of user selectable ways to generate a
standards converted output with correct timecode.

Set up and operation of the Timecode option in Alchemist is achieved through simple easy to
use control screens. The dedicated setup page is used to configure timecode input and
output controls. The main Timecode control page provides a one page status and operation
window, and allows the mode and trigger to be set up while monitoring the input.

Note: The Alchemist Timecode functions are optional. If the Timecode option has not been
purchased, these functions are not available.

B.2 Key Features


• Synchro modes guarantee the first program field/frame at the right timecode, ensuring
that the first program field/frame is clean, with no interpolation and drastically
improving workflow efficiency.

• Timecode processing available in all conversion modes, during frame standards


conversion as well as up, down and cross conversion modes.

• Fully integrated latency compensation – automatic audio, video and timecode


alignment.

• Powerful, easy to use control interface.

• Eliminates the need for external timecode black boxes and infrastructure.

• Timecode processing available in all genlock modes.

• Range of timecode modes to accommodate all potential user applications.

The Alchemist timecode insertion is based upon two timecode concepts. The first of these is
the input timecode trigger (Input Trigger) and the second is the output timecode load (Output
A/B Load).

The input timecode trigger is simply the value of the input video (source) timecode that will
cause an output timecode event to occur. In other words when the input video timecode
equals the specified trigger value the Alchemist will insert timecode according to the mode
and user configuration selected.

The timecode output load is the value of the output timecode to be inserted on the video
field/frame that the Alchemist generated from the input video field/frame with the trigger
timecode value. Note that in doing this the Alchemist automatically compensates for its
internal processing delay.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 124 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Timecode

B.3 Control Interface


There are two principal timecode setup and operation pages, these can be accessed from the
Timecode tab on the home screen.

B.3.1 Input Timecode Setup

B.3.1.1 SD Source

VITC The SD input video timecode is read from the VITC signals.

(SMPTE 12M/SMPTE 266M).

LTC The SD input video timecode is read from the LTC connector.

(SMPTE 12M).

B.3.1.2 HD Source

Emb VITC The HD input video timecode is read from the embedded VITC signals
(SMPTE RP188).

Emb LTC The HD input video timecode is read from the embedded LTC signals
(SMPTE RP188).

LTC The HD input video timecode is read from the LTC connector

(SMPTE 12M).

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 125 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Timecode

B.3.1.3 Frame Count Max

This menu specifies the maximum frame number the input timecode will reach before it resets
to 0. This information is essential for timecode arithmetic.

Detect Detect will measure the frame count max from the input timecode.

Format Format assumes timecode was generated to match the frame rate of
the video.

24/25/30 This will force the input frame count max to the specified setting. This
allows the user to accommodate material that may have been
generated with the wrong frame count max limit, for example,
Slow PAL.

B.3.2 Output Timecode Setup


There are separate controls for outputs A and B as these can be configured independently.
(Note both outputs will adopt the same configuration for “Timecode Mode”).

B.3.2.1 Frame Count Max

This menu specifies the maximum number the output timecode frame counter will reach
before it resets to 0.

Auto Auto assumes timecode is generated to match the specified frame rate
of the output video.

24/25/30 This will force the output frame count max to the specified setting. This
allows the user to pre-compensate for later changes in playback speed,
of the material we generate, for example, Slow PAL.

B.3.2.2 Drop Frame Mode

This menu is only relevant to 59.94Hz output. When enabled, the first two frame numbers (00
and 01) shall be omitted from the count at the start of each minute except minutes 00, 10, 20,
30, 40, and 50. Note if the Alchemist is configured to “E-E” timecode mode and is performing
a 30 fps – 30 fps timecode conversion the output drop/non drop type will follow the input. E.g.
59.94Hz DF input will automatically give a 59.94Hz DF output and vice-versa.

On “On” can only be selected if the output timecode is 30 fps. On will force
the output timecode to be drop frame.

Off “Off” can only be selected if the output timecode is 30 fps. Off will force
the output timecode to be non-drop frame.

B.3.2.3 SD VITC Insertion Line

The menu specifies for an SD output which line of vertical blanking the first insertion of VITC
signal occurs on. If enabled, the second insertion will occur 2 lines below.

625 Default Lines 19/332 and 21/334 (SMPTE 266M).

525 Default Lines 14/277 and 16/279 (SMPTE 266M and RP164).

625 Range Between lines 6/319 and 20/333 (SMPTE 12M and SMPTE 266M).

525 Range Between lines 10/273 and 17/280 (SMPTE 12M and SMPTE 266M).

Note: The range refers the first insertion line not the second (repeat).

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 126 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Timecode

B.3.3 Activate
This menu allows the user to enable/disable the timecode output format. The options are:

• SD Output: VITC/Repeat

• HD OutpActivateut: HD Emb VITC/HD Emb LTC

Note: LTC via the XLR is always enabled.

B.4 Timecode Control

B.4.1 Input Timecode


This displays the input timecode read from the specified source.

Drop Frame will be illuminated when drop frame timecode is detected on the source
timecode.

B.4.2 Timecode Entry


Allows the user to enter the desired timecode value. Presets of 10h 00m 00s 00f and 01h 00m
00s 00f are available.

B.4.3 Input Trigger


The input trigger is the value of the source timecode that will cause an output timecode event
to occur. The display indicates the timecode at which the trigger event will occur. To specify a
different timecode the user can enter a new timecode using the “Timecode Entry” key pad
and then press the “Set” button next to Input Trigger box. Alternatively pressing “Input TC”
sets the trigger timecode to the current input timecode value.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 127 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Timecode

B.4.4 Output A Load


The Output A load specifies the value which will be inserted in the output A timecode when
the input trigger event occurs. As with the input trigger there is a timecode display which
indicates the timecode to be inserted. To specify a different timecode the user should set a
new timecode using the “Timecode Entry” key pad and then press the “Set” button next to the
Output A Load box. Alternatively pressing “Input TC” sets the Output A Load timecode to the
current input timecode value.

B.4.5 Output B Load


The Output B load specifies the value which will be inserted in the output B timecode when
the input trigger event occurs. This can be independent to output A; however both outputs will
adopt the same “Timecode Mode” configuration. As with the input trigger there is a timecode
display which indicates the timecode to be inserted. To specify a different timecode the user
should set a new timecode using the “Timecode Entry” key pad and then press the “Set”
button next to the Output B Load box. Alternatively pressing “Input TC” sets the Output B
Load timecode to the current input timecode value.
Note: The output LTC XLR will always deliver output A timecode.

B.4.6 Prerun
This control is only required when performing a “synchro prerun” timecode conversion. The
Prerun specifies the amount of time before the input trigger the user would like continuous
output timecode. There is a timecode display which indicates the total prerun time. To specify
a different time the user should set a new time code using the “Timecode Entry” key pad and
then press “Set” button next to the Prerun box. This can be reset back to the default of 3
minutes using the “Preset” button.

B.4.7 Output A Timecode


This displays the current value of the timecode being generated for output A (as specified by
“Timecode Mode”). If configured to drop frame the indicator will be illuminated.

B.4.8 Output B Timecode


This displays the current value of the timecode being generated for output B (as specified by
“Timecode Mode”). If configured to drop frame the indicator will be illuminated.

B.4.9 E-E Window


This control is only required when performing an E-E regen or E-E frame rate conversion.

The user can specify the following E – E error window sizes:

Min, ½ sec, 1 sec, 2 sec, 5 sec.

This control defines the size of the error between input timecode and output timecode before
a reset will occur. A reset will realign the output timecode with the input (and thus cause a
discontinuity in timecode).

B.4.10 Manual Trigger


This button allows the user to manually trigger the Synchro start event. It is only applicable to
Synchro Manual and Freerun mode.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 128 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Timecode

B.5 Timecode Mode


Seven “Timecode” modes are available to suit a wide range of applications – Synchro Auto,
Synchro Prerun, Synchro Manual, E-E, E-E Regen, Freerun, and Trigger Load.

These modes fit into three main functions, depending on the job to be performed:

• Synchro

• EE

• Freerun

B.5.1 Timecode Modes at a Glance

B.5.1.1 Synchro Mode

This is the most sophisticated timecode mode available on the Alchemist Ph.C - HD and
offers a fully automated single pass conversion of timecode and video in any genlock
configuration, and ensures the first program field/frame is clean and occurs at the correct time
code.

There are three Synchro Modes:

• Synchro Auto

• Synchro Prerun

• Synchro Manual

B.5.1.2 EE Mode

This mode is desirable in any application where the user would like the output timecode to
mirror the input timecode as close as possible. This mode is ideal for converting rushes with
discontinuous timecode or preview copies in different standards.

There are two EE modes:

• EE

• EE Regen

B.5.1.3 Freerun Mode

This mode is used for applications where a free running timecode generator is required; this
mode could be used to stripe a tape with timecode.

B.5.2 Synchro Auto


This is the most sophisticated timecode mode available on the Alchemist and offers a fully
automated single pass conversion of timecode and video in any genlock configuration

The user must configure an input trigger event, and set a desired output timecode load value.
In our example the input trigger is 01h 00m 00s 00f and the output load value is 10h 00m 00s
00f. Once the Alchemist has detected 5 seconds of continuous input timecode it will action the
“synchro start” event. After this event occurs there will be a few fields/frames of discontinuity
in the audio, video and timecode output whilst the Alchemist performs the required timecode
arithmetic and subsequently configures the system in such a way that guarantees:

• The output video will be clean (no interpolation) at the input trigger event.

• The output timecode is generated in a manner which will result in the desired load
value occurring at the specified input trigger event. This means both pre-program and
program content will contain continuous timecode.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 129 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Timecode

For the Alchemist to perform this mode:

• The source must contain a minimum of 5 seconds continuous timecode prior to the
input trigger event. Any input timecode discontinuity will trigger a new synchro start
event, as will changing input/output/reference setup.

It may be necessary to increase the video processing latency by up to 1 frame. Any audio
being routed through the Alchemist will automatically compensate for this additional delay
and Snell external audio delays controlled by RollTrack will also accommodate the change.
Users should be careful if using other external audio equipment as it is not possible to predict
in advance the change in processing delay.

New screenshot required

B.5.3 Synchro Prerun


This is similar to the Synchro Auto mode other than the user must specify the desired pre-run
time. The pre-run specifies the amount of continuous output timecode prior to the output load
timecode. Note: A synchro start event will not occur unless input timecode passes through the
synchro start event timecode.

Synchro Start Event = Input Trigger Timecode – Prerun Timecode – 5 seconds

Synchro Start Event Complete = Input Trigger Timecode – Prerun Timecode

The Synchro process takes approximately 5 seconds to complete. The source must contain
continuous timecode for a minimum of the prerun time plus 5 seconds before the input trigger
timecode for correct operation. In our example the prerun value is set to 00h 00m 30s 00f,
therefore the synchro start event will occur at the approximate input timecode 00h 59m 25s
00f.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 130 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Timecode

B.5.4 Synchro Manual


This is identical to the Synchro Auto mode other than the user doesn’t need to configure a
prerun time. In this mode the user triggers the Synchro start event by pressing the “Manual
Trigger” button. In all other aspects the conversion is the same as Synchro Prerun.

B.5.5 E-E
This mode is desirable in any application where the user would like the output timecode to
track the input timecode with minimum error. There is no concept of input trigger or output
load values as the translation of timecode is continuous.

When frame rate converting, the incoming and outgoing timecodes are converted into a frame
number and compared. If the difference between them is greater than the size specified by
the “E-E Window” the output timecode is reset to match the input. The output timecode is
effectively free running with resets where needed. The user may specify output timecode
maximum frame count (when appropriate), and may select between non drop frame and drop
frame timecode.

When performing a non frame rate conversion (i.e. input and output are the same frame rate)
then the input timecode will simply be handed over to the output (with correct delay
compensation). If the video gets synchronized (i.e. a field/frame drop or repeat) the timecode
will replicate this behavior and drop or repeat, thus the input timecode is transparently passed
from input to output. In this mode the maximum frame count and drop/non drop frame
switches are disabled as they are copied from the input. The output timecode will only free
run if the input timecode is lost.

Note: Synchronizing events can be eliminated if the Alchemist is IO locked or the source is
locked to the same reference as the Alchemist.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 131 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Timecode

B.5.6 E-E Regen


Same performance as described above for E-E mode when frame rate converting.

When performing a non frame rate conversion (i.e. input and output are the same frame rate),
the same timecode regeneration technique as in E-E mode with frame rate conversion is
used. Thus the user can specify the output maximum frame count, whether the timecode is
drop frame or non drop frame and set the window size. Setting the window to be large (e.g.
several seconds) would be useful for converting rushes which contain sequences of a
reasonable length and where it is desirable the output timecode doesn’t contain any
discontinuities.

B.5.7 Freerun
This mode is particularly useful for applications where there is no input timecode present.
There is no concept of an Input Trigger event in this mode. The Alchemist will simply freerun
from the current time. A new output load timecode can be specified and then manually loaded
using the “Manual Trigger” button.

B.5.8 Trigger Load


The user must specify an Input Trigger timecode. At this specified time the Alchemist will load
the outputs with the preconfigured output load timecodes and freerun thereafter.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 132 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Timecode

B.5.9 Timecode Control Warnings


The timecode displays for the Input Trigger, Output Loads, and Prerun change color to
indicate valid or invalid values.

Green Indicates that the value is valid, and that the corresponding event will
occur when the specified timecode is reached.

Yellow Indicates that the value is not currently valid, but if certain conditions,
such as the input standard or timecode type change, the corresponding
event may occur.

For example, if the Input Trigger timecode is set to occur on a frame


that does not exist in the current input standard, the value appears in
yellow. However; if before the Input Trigger timecode is reached, the
input standard changes to one in which the specified frame occurs, the
input trigger event will occur.

Red The specified value is not valid, and will not be so under any
circumstances.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 133 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Timecode

B.5.10 Operational Example


This section illustrates how the Timecode option would be setup, and the sequence of events
that would occur while performing a Synchro Auto job.

In this scenario:

• The unit is performing a 1080/50i to 1080/59i drop frame conversion.

• The source tape starts at 09h 59m 00s 00f.

• The program starts at 01h 00m 00s 00f.

• The deliverable program must start at 10h 00m 00s 00f.

Timecode Control Page:

• The mode is set to Synchro Auto

• The Input Trigger has been set to 01h 00m 00s 00f.

• The Output A Load has been set to 10h 00m 00s 00f.

• The Output B Load has been set to 01h 00m 00s 00f.

The unit is now set up. Press play on the source deck.

Note: After pressing the play button, waiting approximately 5 seconds before pressing record will
eliminate discontinuity as the Alchemist achieves lock.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 134 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Timecode

B.5.10.1 Input Timecode = 00h 59m 02s 06f

At this point, the timecode configuration has just been adjusted, and the unit is initializing.

Output A Timecode is displaying an IP timecode error, due to discontinuous input timecode.

Output B Timecode is displaying an Output stability warning. This condition can be caused
by anything that can alter the timecode arithmetic. For example, an I/O standard change, a
reference change, or a genlock change.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 135 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Timecode

B.5.10.2 Input Timecode = 00h 59m 07s 01f

As the Alchemist performs its timecode calculations, Output A Timecode and Output B
Timecode now display Calibrate.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 136 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Timecode

B.5.10.3 Input Timecode = 00h 59m 09s 21f

After the Alchemist has completed the timecode calculations, and now performs the
necessary synchronization to ensure a clean program start, with the correct timecode,
Output A Timecode and Output B Timecode now display Synchro. Press record on the
output deck.

Note: After pressing the play button, waiting approximately 5 seconds before pressing record will
eliminate discontinuity as the Alchemist achieves lock.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 137 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Timecode

B.5.10.4 Input Timecode = 00h 59m 15s 04f

The Alchemist is now in prerun. All discontinuities have occurred, and the output timecode is
in prerun and ramping up to the specified load time. Prerun is displayed for both the Output A
Timecode and the Output B Timecode.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 138 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Timecode

B.5.10.5 Input Timecode = 01h 00m 15s 12f

The synchro conversion has successfully been performed. As specified, the Output A
program started at 10h 00m 00s 00f and the Output B program started at 01h 00m 00s 00f,
both with a clean field at the program start (no interpolation).

Note: The time the synchro event occurred, together with the elapsed time, can be confirmed on
the Timecode Control screen.

This set-up requires no further changes for similar jobs, just put the tape in.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 139 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Timecode

B.6 Questions & Answers


Q1. How will timecode be aligned with a 720 50P/59 video output?

A1. As with other conversion modes (such as CleanCut and Frame Synchronizing) care
should be taken using timecode when both interlaced and progressive outputs are required.
In such a scenario it is recommended that the primary output (A) is configured to output
interlaced and the secondary output (B) is configured to progressive. If configured the other
way round and performing a “Synchro” timecode conversion, the insertion of the timecode
load value and the clean program start could be early or late by a field on output B.

Q2. What happens if I have set up a “Synchro Auto” conversion, but start playing the
source VTR from a time post the specified input trigger timecode?

A2. The Alchemist will simply interpret this as the user wanting to perform synchro event a
long way in advance. The synchro event will occur, the arithmetic will be performed allowing
for the wrap at 59h 59m 59s 24/29f and the Alchemist will be armed to ensure correct
operation at the specified input trigger point.

Q3. Does my source need to be locked to the same reference as the Alchemist for the
“synchro” timecode modes to work reliably?

A3. No, the Alchemist will measure the input to derive its frequency and modify its timecode
arithmetic accordingly. However, the Alchemist does assume the source is stable. If the
source clock is fluctuating this could result in an incorrect timecode conversion.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 140 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com RGB Legalizer and Luma Clipper

Appendix C. RGB Legalizer and Luma Clipper


The Alchemist Ph.C-HD incorporates an RGB legalizer and comprehensive luma clipper. The
luma clipper can be used in combination with the “735mV” legalizer selection to generate
images which adhere to EBU R103-200 specification.

C.1 RGB Legalizer Overview


Illegal colors are represented by values of RGB that are outside a nominal range (typically 0
to 700mV) when converted to analog values. Illegal RGB colors are easily generated in
YCbCr space because of the differences in the valid colorspace between RGB and YCbCr.
RGB occupies a restricted colorspace in the shape of a paralleloid within the YCbCr cube as
illustrated in the diagram below.

White
Y

C
G

Y M
R

Cr
B
Black

Cb

It can be seen there are many YCrCb values which lie outside the RGB space, and would
consequently generate illegal values when converted to analog for display.

Upon detection of illegal RGB colors, there are a variety of techniques to bring them back into
legal colorspace. Most legalizers will simply de-saturate the chrominance, leaving the
luminance unaltered. The legalizer in the Alchemist is more advanced, and is able to preserve
the original saturation to a much greater extent by modifying the luminance and chrominance
signals simultaneously, giving the best visually subjective results.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 141 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com RGB Legalizer and Luma Clipper

C.2 RGB Legalizer Controls


Off Disables RGB legalisation.

700mV RGB Lo 0mV, RGB Hi 700mV, will comply with area mask set 1% or
greater,

721mV RGB Lo -21mV, RGB Hi 721mV, will comply with area mask set 0% or
greater.

735mV RGB Lo -35mV, RGB Hi 735mV, will comply with are mask set 0% or
greater.

Area Mask Defines the percentage of total pixels in the image that may be out of
RGB gamut without reporting that the signal has an RGB gamut error.

Note: The 735mV selection should be used in conjunction with the luma clipper (set at presets) to
generate images that adhere to EBU R103-200 specification.

C.3 Luma Clipper Overview


When luminance levels are too high or too low, devices such as encoders and displays can
have problems. The luminance clipper is used to limit signals above and below predefined
limits. Minimum and maximum limits can be set, in addition a knee that allows for a graduated
transition to the limit.

C.4 Luma Clipper Controls


Luma This enables the clipper.
Clipper
Enable

White Max This sets up the upper limit (hard clip point) of the clipper. The range is
minimum 90% (852 digital 10-bit value) to maximum 109% (1019) with
increments of 1%. Preset is 103% (966).

White Knee This sets up the knee for the maximum white limit of the clipper. This
can be set up to give a “soft clip” from this knee point to the hard white
clip point. The range is minimum 60% (590) to maximum 109% (1019)
with increments of 1%. Preset is 100% (940).

Black Min This sets up the lower limit (hard clip point) of the clipper. The range is
minimum -7% (4) to maximum 10% (152) with increments of 1%.
Preset is -1% (55).

Black Knee This sets up the knee for the minimum black limit of the clipper. This
can be set up to give a “soft clip” from this knee point to the hard black
clip point. The range is minimum -7% (4) to maximum 60% (590) with
increments of 1%. Preset is 0% (64).

Note: The Luma clip preset values configure the clipper to meet luma limits as specified by EBU
R103-200.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 142 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com RGB Legalizer and Luma Clipper

White Max
White soft clip region

Luma Clip Output

Black soft clip region


Black Min

Black Knee White Knee


Luma Clip Input

To achieve a hard white clip set the White Max and White Knee to the same value. Similarly
to achieve a hard black clip set the Black Min and the Black Knee to the same value.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 143 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com FilmTools

Appendix D. FilmTools

D.1 Overview
FilmTools is based on the tried and tested film handling capability of the Alchemist Platinum,
providing broadcasters, content owners and facilities with a proven means of converting to,
from and between frame based material with comprehensive integrated Timecode support as
standard.

The addition of FilmTools greatly extends the range of supported video standards, providing
the Alchemist Ph.C-HD with a unique range of capabilities and adds the all important
processing modes necessary to enable you to handle the widest range of workflows possible,
all to the best achievable quality.

With FilmTools, Alchemist Ph.C-HD is extended to handle frame based material at 23.98, 24,
25, 29.97 and 30Hz as well as SlowPAL formats at 23, 24, 47 and 48Hz. This I/O format
flexibility is combined with three powerful Ph.C based technologies:

• “DEFTplus” techniques allow the Alchemist PhC-HD to accurately identify and


process the original film content in 59.94Hz sources. This robust identification of
original material enables the conversion of 59.94Hz mixed film and video originated
material, typical of episodics, to be performed at the highest quality.

• “P-film” provides similar benefits to DEFTplus for those operating with 50Hz mixed
media sources.

• Video-to-Film processing allows the conversion of 50Hz or 59.94Hz interlaced


formats to frame based 23.98Hz video, using a proprietary application of Ph.C motion
compensation.

Combining the power of Ph.C, DEFTplus, P-Film and Video-to-Film processing, the FilmTools
Option addresses the challenges of converting to, from, and between any of the many frame
based material formats.

FilmTools has been designed with the challenges of real program material in mind:

• Accurate and agile detection of film originated 2:3 or 2:2 sequences

• Detection and clean processing of film originated 2:3 or 2:2 with broken cadence

• Handles mixed film and video content

• Agile field pairing ensures varispeed and animation at variable frame rates are no
problem

• Easily maintain programme length for any conversion type

• Create clean, continuous 2:3 or 2:2 sequences at the output

• Powerful timecode tools give guaranteed program start and eliminate costly rejects

• Powerful, easy to use control interface

• Fully integrated latency compensation – automatic video, audio and timecode


alignment.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 144 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com FilmTools

D.2 FilmTools Control and Setup


There are four principal FilmTools control and setup pages. These can be accessed from the
FilmTools tab on the Home screen.

• Input Cadence: This page allows the user to define a film cadence for the incoming
content. A single, continuous and perfect cadence can be defined flawlessly by its
relationship to timecode or by aligning an internal free running cadence generator. If
the content contains discontinuous or mixed cadence or, if the cadence is unknown
prior to conversion, Detect mode performs real time analysis to assign cadence.

• Control: This page allows the user setup FilmTools controls. These controls are
specific to FilmTools conversions only.

• Output Cadence: This page allows the user to control the cadence of the converted
content. This menu allows the user to select the required cadence including any
required relationship with output timecode.

• Detection: This page allows the user to control and bias the internal sequence
detection algorithm. The sequence detector has been optimized to dynamically
identify all cadence types on a field by field (or frame by frame) basis. i.e. 2:2, 2:3,
broken 2:3, 1:1 (field by field or frame by frame), varispeed.

For specific details of the FilmTools controls see “FilmTools” on page 86.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 145 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com FilmTools

D.2.1 Enabling FilmTools


The FilmTools option is enabled and disabled from the Conversion menu.

ON Enables the FilmTools option. This is the default setting.

OFF Disables the FilmTools Option. Note PsF standards will be grayed out.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 146 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com FilmTools

D.2.2 FilmTools Input Setup

D.2.2.1 Input Cadence Alignment Control

Auto Cadence is defined by the internal sequence detector unless a PsF


(Default) input standard has been selected in which case perfect frame
segmentation is assumed (i.e. 2:2 F1/2)

Detect Cadence is defined by the internal sequence detector (even when PsF
inputs are selected).

1:1 Incoming content is interpreted as 1:1 cadence (field by field or frame


by frame motion).

2:2 F1/2 All incoming content is interpreted as 2:2 F1/F2 (PsF) cadence.
(PsF)

2:2 F2/1 All incoming content is interpreted as 2:2 F2/F1 (PsF) cadence.

2:3 TC Incoming content is interpreted as continuous 2:3 cadence derived


Datum from continuous input timecode by identifying the specific 2:3 frame
type and timecode of an input ‘Datum’ frame.

2:3 TC 0&5 Incoming content is interpreted as continuous 2:3 cadence defined by a


specific relationship to the frame count of non-drop frame input
timecode.

2:3 Freerun Incoming content is interpreted as continuous 2:3 cadence derived


from an internal free running 2:3 cadence generator.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 147 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com FilmTools

D.2.2.2 2:3 TC Datum

2:3 Datum Cadence

AA (Default) This control defines the 2:3 cadence of the Datum frame when the input
BB, cadence control is 2:3 TC Datum mode.
BC,
CD, See “Understanding 2:3 Datum Cadence” on page 165.
DD

2:3 Cadence reset

On Valid TC Input 2:3 cadence will be defined according to the 2:3 Datum Cadence
(Default) and Timecode controls when stable input timecode has been detected.
The input timecode may be greater or less than specified 2:3 Datum
Timecode.

At Datum Input 2:3 cadence will be defined according to the 2:3 Datum Cadence
and Timecode controls. The cadence reset occurs when the input
timecode is equal to the 2:3 Datum Timecode.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 148 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com FilmTools

2:3 Datum Timecode

Input (Default) The 2:3 Datum Timecode is automatically set to match the
Timecode timecode “Input Trigger” value.
Trigger
(Default)

Independent The 2:3 Datum Timecode can be set to any required frame.
Cadence
Trigger

2:3 Max time pre-datum

0–23 hours Defines the start of the Cadence Window. Only applicable when 2:3
Cadence Reset is set to “On Valid TC”.
(Default 12
hours) See “Understanding Datum TC Conversion” on page 163.

D.2.2.3 2:3 TC 0 & 5

0 & 5 Cadence

AA (Default) This control defines the phase of the relationship between frame count
BB, and input timecode. When a frame count of 0 & 5 is present the 2:3
BC, phase can be set any one of the five frame types.
CD,
DD See “Understanding 2:3 Datum Cadence” on page 165.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 149 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com FilmTools

D.2.2.4 2:3 Freerun

Cadence Offset

-/+ The cadence of the free running 2:3 generator maybe offset.

See “Understanding Datum TC Conversion” on page 163.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 150 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com FilmTools

D.2.3 FilmTools Output Setup

D.2.3.1 Output Cadence Alignment Control

Off No specific cadence will be forced. Outgoing content will follow the
Input (field by field or frame by frame motion).

2:2 F1/2 All outgoing content is interpreted as 2:2 F1/F2 (PsF) cadence.
(PsF)

2:2 F2/1 All outgoing content is interpreted as 2:2 F2/F1 (PsF) cadence.

2:3 TC Outgoing content is interpreted as continuous 2:3 cadence derived


Datum from continuous input timecode by identifying the specific 2:3 frame
type and timecode of an input ‘Datum’ frame.

2:3 TC 0&5 Outgoing content is interpreted as continuous 2:3 cadence defined by a


specific relationship to the frame count of non-drop frame input
timecode.

2:3 Freerun Outgoing content is interpreted as continuous 2:3 cadence derived


from an internal free running 2:3 cadence generator.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 151 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com FilmTools

D.2.3.2 2:3 TC Datum

2:3 Datum Cadence

AA (Default) This control defines the 2:3 cadence of the Datum frame when the input
BB, cadence control is 2:3 TC Datum mode.
BC,
CD, See “Understanding 2:3 Datum Cadence” on page 165.
DD

2:3 Cadence reset

On Valid TC Output 2:3 cadence will be defined according to the 2:3 Datum
(Default) Cadence and Timecode controls when a stable output timecode has
been detected. The output timecode may be greater or less than
specified 2:3 Datum Timecode.

At Datum Output 2:3 cadence will be defined according to the 2:3 Datum
Cadence and Timecode controls. The cadence reset occurs when the
output timecode is equal to the 2:3 Datum Timecode.

2:3 Datum Timecode

Output Load (Default) The 2:3 Datum Timecode is automatically set to match the
A Timecode timecode “Output A Load” timecode.
(Default)

Independent The 2:3 Datum Timecode can be set to any required frame.
Cadence
Trigger

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 152 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com FilmTools

2:3 Max time pre-datum

0–23 hours Defines the start of the Cadence Window. Only applicable when 2:3
Cadence Reset is set to “On Valid TC”.
(Default 12
hours) See “Understanding Datum TC Conversion” on page 163.

D.2.3.3 2:3 TC 0 & 5

0 & 5 Cadence

AA (Default) This control defines the phase of the relationship between frame count
BB, and output timecode. When a frame count of 0 & 5 is present the 2:3
BC, phase can be set any one of the five frame types.
CD,
DD See “Understanding 2:3 Datum Cadence” on page 165.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 153 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com FilmTools

D.2.3.4 2:3 Freerun

Cadence Offset

-/+ The cadence of the free running 2:3 generator maybe offset.

See “Understanding 2:3 Datum Cadence” on page 165.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 154 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com FilmTools

D.2.4 FimTools Control Setup

D.2.4.1 Mode

Auto Selects between synchronized, interpolated (linear) and MC


(Default) interpolated (motion compensated interpolation) conversion as
appropriate depending on the input and output formats specified. See
“Conversion Tables” on page 161. Interpolation gives the smoothest
motion profile. Synchronize disables temporal interpolation and
maintains clean frames. Note synchronize mode can cause field/frame
drops or repeats depending on the input and output frequencies
selected.

Synchronize Forces the conversion by synchronization.

Interpolate Forces the conversion by linear interpolation.

MC Forces the conversion by motion compensated interpolation.


Interpolate

D.2.4.2 Film Aperture

Normal This aperture maximizes the vertical resolution from the incoming film
(Default) material. This is the optimum aperture for most applications.

Sharp This aperture maintains maximum possible vertical resolution with the
result that it is less tolerant to film sequence detection errors

Safe This aperture is film safe. It is the most tolerant to film sequence
detection errors. Note this mode is useful in applications where the film
content contains mixed cadence regions

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 155 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com FilmTools

2.4.2.1 Video to film blur

Video to film blur allows any video-to-film conversion to have controlled blur added in areas of
movement. Using Ph.C, this process ensures that the amount of blur is proportional to the
speed and direction of the motion so that fast moving objects will be blurred more than the
slower ones. This mimics the blur usually associated with production on 35mm film.

Blur Enable Select this option to enable film blur.

Blur Use the slider bar to adjust the blur strength from 0 (min) to 8 (max).
Strength

D.2.5 FilmTools Detection Setup


The Alchemist utilizes a complex integrated detection algorithm to identify content type and
cadence information. This algorithm has been optimized so that the maximum possible range
of material can be converted in a single pass. In some rare cases it may be desirable to bias
the algorithm using the following controls.

D.2.5.1 Video Enable

On (Default) Allows the sequence detector to positively identify content as 1:1


(video).

Off The sequence detector will never identify content as video.

D.2.5.2 Film Enable

Any (Default) Allows the sequence detector to identify film of any cadence.
This may be 2:2, 2:3, discontinuous 2:3, orphan fields, varispeed or
animation.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 156 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com FilmTools

2:2 Forces the sequence detection to identify film content as 2:2 cadence
only. Content may be F1/2 or F2/1.

2:3 Forces the sequence detection to identify film content as 2:3 cadence
only. The 2:3 cadence may be discontinuous.

Animation Optimized sequence detection algorithm specifically for animation.

Off The sequence detector will not identify content as film.

D.2.5.3 Bias

Normal This is the optimum setting for most applications. The detection
(Default) algorithms have been optimized to give the most accurate results for
the greatest possible range of material.

Video 2 In some rare cases in may be desirable to bias the sequence detector
Video 1 such that it is more likely to detect video or more likely to detect film.
Film 1 Video 2 biases more strongly towards video than Video 1. Similarly
Film 2 Film 2 biases more strongly towards film than Film 1.

D.2.5.4 Window Control

This control allows the sequence and cut detection to be restricted to specific areas of the
image. A typical detection application would be to avoid sequence detection errors caused by
artifacts near the images edges. A typical cut detection application would be to prevent the
detection of cuts occurring within a specific region of the image.

Auto The sequence/cut detection region will be set to default values.


(Default)

Track Input The sequence/cut detection region will track with the settings for input
Blanking blanking.

User The user may manually define a specific sequence/cut detection


region.

D.2.5.5 Window Overlay

Off The sequence/cut detection region overlay is disabled.


(Darken)

Darken The active sequence/cut detection region is shown with reduced


luminance.

Grayed The active sequence/cut detection region is shown in mono.

D.2.5.6 User Window

Left Defines the left edge of the detection region as a percentage of the
picture width.
0–100%

(Default 1%)

Right Defines the right edge of the detection region as a percentage of the
picture width.
0–100%

(Default
99%)

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 157 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com FilmTools

Top Defines the top edge of the detection region as a percentage of the
picture height.
0–100%

(Default 1%)

Bottom Defines the bottom edge of the detection region as a percentage of the
picture height.
0–100%

(Default
99%)

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 158 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com FilmTools

D.3 Operational Examples


This section provides examples of common FilmTools conversions.

Note: Before performing any FilmTools conversion, it is recommended that the Alchemist is
referenced to the input or an external reference source.

See “Genlock & FilmTools” on page 165.

D.3.1 Operational Example 1


This example describes how to perform a FilmTools conversion from 625 23.98PsF to 525
59.94i 2:3 (2:3 Insertion).

1. In the Conversion menu, turn FilmTools On.

2. In the Input menu, select 625 23PsF Input standard.

3. In the Output menu, select 525 59i Output standard.

4. In the FilmTools Input menu, set the Input Cadence control to Auto.

5. In the FilmTools Output menu, set the Output Cadence control to 2:3 Freerun.

D.3.2 Operational Example 2


This example describes how to perform a FilmTools conversion from 1080 59.94i 2:3 (with
video inserts) to 1080 23.98 PsF. Video inserts will be converted to film.

1. In the Conversion menu, turn FilmTools On.

2. In the Input menu, select 1080 59i Input standard.

3. In the Output menu, select 1080 23PsF Output standard.

4. In the FilmTools Input menu, set the FilmTools Input Cadence control to Auto.

5. In the FilmTools Detection menu, set Film Enable to On.

6. In the FilmTools Output menu, set output Cadence to 2:2 F1/2 (PsF).

D.3.3 Operational Example 3


This example describes how to perform a FilmTools conversion from 1080 23.98PsF to 525
59.94i 2:3 – the source is a feature film with continuous cadence and timecode split across
two tapes.

Tape 1 10:00:00:00 > 10:59:59:29

Tape 2 11:00:00:00 > 11:30:00:00

Output cadence should start at hour 10:00:00:00 with a start phase of AA.

Setup:

1. In the Conversion menu, turn FilmTools On.

2. In the Input menu, select 1080 23PsF Input standard.

3. In the Output menu, select 525 59i Output standard.

4. In the FilmTools Input menu, set the Input Cadence control to 2:2 F1/2.

5. In the FilmTools Output menu, set output cadence control to 2:3 TC Datum.

6. Set Output 2:3 Datum Cadence to AA.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 159 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com FilmTools

7. Set 2:3 Cadence Reset to At Datum

8. Set an independent cadence datum cadence of 10:00:00:00

9. Both tapes can be converted without any further setup.

D.3.4 See “Understanding 2:3 Datum Cadence” on page 165.Operational Example 4


This example describes how to perform a FilmTools conversion from 1080 25PsF to 1080
24PsF. The PsF material contains some moderate motion speeds and it is desirable to
maintain a smooth motion profile in the output. This conversion is desirable in applications
where it is deemed unacceptable to perform a 4% speed adjustment during playout. Typical
examples would include applications where the audio is critical (e.g. Operas) or when it is
crucial to maintain the exact program length (e.g. adverts).

Setup:

1. In the Conversion menu, turn FilmTools On.

2. In the Input menu, select 1080 25PsF Input standard.

3. In the Output menu, select 1080 24PsF Output standard.

4. In the FilmTools Input menu, set the Input Cadence control to Auto.

5. In the FilmTools Output menu, set the Output Cadence control to 2:2 F1/F2 (PsF).

6. In the FilmTools Detection menu, set the film mode to Auto.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 160 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com FilmTools

D.4 Conversion Tables


The FilmTools suite comprises a number of different temporal conversion techniques. Each
technique has been optimized for a specific application. The Alchemist Ph.C-HD will select
the most appropriate technique depending on the input/output standard combination
selected.

With some conversions there is only one technique available, others can be influenced using
the film Mode control (see FilmTools control).

These tables indicate which conversion technique the Alchemist will adopt depending on the
various standard combinations. If only one mode is available the film Mode control has no
effect. For conversions which offer the user a choice, the behavior of Mode in film Auto is
indicated in brackets.

FILM OUTPUT

Native 23 23 24 24 25 29 30

Transport 47 2:2 59 2:3 48 2:2 60 2:3 50 2:2 59 2:2 60 2:2

23 47 2:2 S P ISIM (IM) ISIM (IM) ISIM (IM) ISIM (IM) ISIM (IM)

23 59 2:3 D SR IS (I) S IS (I) S S

24 48 2:2 ISIM (S) ISIM (I) S P ISIM (IM) ISIM (IM) ISIM (IM)
FILM
INPUT 24 60 2:3 IS (I) S D SR IS (I) S S

25 50 2:2 ISIM (IM) ISIM (I) ISIM (IM) ISIM (IM) S ISIM (IM) ISIM (IM)

29 59 2:2 S S ISIM (IM) S ISIM (IM) S ISIM (IM)

30 60 2:2 ISIM (IM) S S S ISIM (IM) ISIM (IM) S

VIDEO OUTPUT

Native
47 48 50 59 60
Transport

23 47 2:2 S ISIM (SZ) ISIM (S) ISIM (S) ISIM (S)

23 59 2:3 D IS (S) IS (S) S IS (SZ)

24 48 2:2 ISIM (S) S ISIM (S) ISIM (S) ISIM (S)


FILM
INPUT 24 60 2:3 IS (S) D IS (S) IS (S) S

25 50 2:2 ISIM (S) ISIM (S) S ISIM (S) ISIM (S)

29 59 2:2 ISIM (S) ISIM (S) ISIM (S) S ISIM (S)

30 60 2:2 ISIM (S) S ISIM (S) ISIM (S) S

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 161 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com FilmTools

VIDEO OUTPUT

Native 47 48 50 59 60

47 S M M M M

48 M S M M M
VIDEO
INPUT 50 M M S M M

59 M M M S M

60 M M M M S

FILM OUTPUT

Native 23 23 24 24 25 29 30

47 2:2 59 2:3 48 2:2 60 2:3 50 2:2 59 2:2 60 2:2

47 S P M P M M M
VIDEO
48 M P S P M M M
INPUT
50 M PM M PM S M M

59 M PM M PM M S M

60 M PM M PM M M S

KEY

S Synchronisation

SR Synchronisation with 2:3 repair

ISS Interpolation (I) or Synchronisation (S)

ISIM Interpolation (I), Synchronisation (S) or MC Interpolation (IM)

M Motion Compensated Interpolation

P Pulldown (2:3) Insertion

PM Pulldown (2:3) Insertion via Motion Compensated Interpolation

D DEFT/DEFTplus (2:3 pulldown removal)

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 162 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com FilmTools

D.5 Understanding Datum TC Conversion

D.5.1 TC Datum with ‘On Valid TC’


FilmTools allows both input and output 2:3 cadence phase to be locked to timecode. 2:3 TC
Datum mode allows the user to configure a datum timecode with a specified 2:3 phase. When
On Valid TC is selected, upon receipt of valid timecode the Alchemist will perform the
required Datum calculations ensuring the cadence will be locked to the specified Datum
timecode. The cadence window defines a 24 hour period of time used to define the behavior
of the Datum calculations.

If the timecode was post Datum the Alchemist will extrapolate forwards in time. If the
timecode was pre-datum the Alchemist will extrapolate backwards in time. The Max Time
Pre-datum defines at what timecode the Datum calculations switch from extrapolating
forwards to extrapolating backwards.

If incorrectly configured the user may not get the desired cadence. For most cases the default
value of 12 hours for Max Time Pre-datum will give the desired cadence.

D.5.1.1 Example (Figure 1)

As shown in “Figure 1:” on page 164, the Max Time Pre-datum is set to 9 hours. This gives a
start of cadence window of 01:00:00:00 and a corresponding end of cadence window of
00:59:59:29 (24 hours later). The Datum timecode is set to 10:00:00:00. For any timecode
after the 01:00:00:00 but before 10:00:00:00 the cadence will be extrapolated backwards. For
any timecode after 10:00:00:00 but before 01:00:00:00 the cadence will be extrapolated
forwards.

If the Max Time Pre-datum had been set to 1 hour, it would mean any timecode before
09:00:00:00 would be extrapolated forwards. Had the user wanted to lock input cadence to
the datum of 10:00:00:00 but started the tape rolling at 08:00:00:00 they would have wanted
the calculation to be extrapolated backwards. With the current settings the resultant cadence
wouldn’t have been phase locked and continuous up to the datum.

D.5.2 2:3 TC Datum with ‘At Datum’


If the user simply wanted to lock input or output 2:3 cadence phase to timecode without the
Alchemist performing the Datum calculations upon detection of valid timecode the 2:3
Cadence Reset should be set to At Datum. In this mode the Alchemist will reset the cadence
to the specified phase when timecode is equal to the specified 2:3 Datum Timecode.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 163 © 2011 Snell Limited


Control Settings:

Example 1: Example 2: 30frames/ sdropframetimecodeassumed

Issue 3 Rev 1
Validtimecodehasavaluebetweendatumtimecode CadenceControl =2:3TCDatum
Validtimecodehasavaluebetweendatumtimecode
andstart of cadencewindow(2:3DatumTimecode– 2:3DatumTimecode=10:00:00:00
Alchemist Ph.C-HD

andendof cadencewindow.
Extrapolated cadence MaxTimePreDatum) Max TimePreDatum= 9hours
2:3DatumCadence=AA
2:3CadenceReset =At Datum
AA- 2 AA AA+ 2

f2 f1 f2 f1 f2 f1 f2 f1 f2 f1 f2 f1 f2 f1 f2
Figure 1:

ValidTCpresent at 09:00:00:00 ValidTCpresent at 11:00:00:00


Number of framessincedatumtimecode=107,892(df) Number of frames sincedatumtimecode=107,892(df)
107,892mod5=2 107,892mod5= 2

A C D D D A A B B B C C D D D Therefore: Therefore:

CD DD AA BB BC CD DD
Cadence=AA- 2 Cadence=AA+2
-2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 Cadenceextrapolatedbackwardsto09:00:00:00= CD Cadenceextrapolatedforwardsto11:00:00:00=BC

24 hour cadencewindow

Start of Cadence Window Endof CadenceWindow


DatumTimecode

Page 164
01:00:00:00 00:59:59:29
10:00:00:00
www.snellgroup.com

2:3 DatumCadence=AA

Max Time Pre Datum


9hours

Cadence extrapolatedbackwards Cadence extrapolated forwards

Not toscale
TIME

©
Continuouscadence

After thecadencehasbeenset relativetotheDatumonreceipt of validtimecoe, it will


continueindefinately until timecodeisdisrupted. Thismayexceeda24hour period.
FilmTools

2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com FilmTools

D.6 Understanding 2:3 Datum Cadence


Understanding the 5 frame types of a 2:3 sequence AA, BB, BC, CD, DD.

Figure 2:

Start of 10 field End of 10 field


sequence AA (A frame) sequence

f2 f1 f2 f1 f2 f1 f2 f1 f2 f1 f2 f1 f2 f1 f2 f1 f2 f1

B C D D D A A B B B C C D D D A A B

AA BB BC CD DD

AA = 2 field frame
BBB = 3 field frame
CC = 2 field frame
DDD = 3 field frame

The 5 frame types describe each of the 5 phase within a 10 field 2:3 sequence. 4 sequential
source film frames are shown in bold in figure 2 – A, B, C, D. Each phase is identified by
describing the first and second field of the video frame using the A, B, C, D reference.

For example:

Phase 2 is described as “BB”. In this instance both the first and second fields are derived from
source frame B. Phase 4 however is derived from source frames C and D. In this case the
label would read “CD”.

D.7 Genlock & FilmTools


It is recommended practice to reference the Alchemist when performing any FilmTools
conversion.

It is important to reference the Alchemist as this prevents the frame synchronizer from
performing additional frame drops or repeats. These extra drops or repeats may introduce an
irregular motion profile or in some cases cause a discontinuous cadence.

This can be achieved by:

• Setting the reference menu item to Input.

• Setting the reference menu item to External and applying an external reference. The
source should share the same externally applied reference.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 165 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com FilmTools

D.8 Questions & Answers


Q1. Why would I want to set up a sequence detection region?

A1. Pictures edges may contain artifacts unrelated to the image content which if not excluded
from the sequence detection could impede or prevent correct sequence detection.
Alternatively, some complex material may contain images with different cadences present.
This feature allows the user to lock onto the favored cadence.

Q2. Why would I want to use “On Valid Timecode” mode of operation?

A2. The feature is very useful in applications where content has been spanned across
multiple tapes. Each tape must contain constant cadence and timecode following on from the
previous tape.

Q3. Can I leave the Alchemist in Detect mode all the time?

A3. Yes you can. However, in some rare circumstances material may not contain a clear
motion signature.

Q4. Why does the latency of the Alchemist increase when FilmTools is enabled?

A4. In order to perform high quality sequence detection and process sequence changes
correctly from the first field of the new sequence the Alchemist requires a longer period of
analysis.

Q5. Can the user set up independent cadences on output A and output B?

A5. This is not possible – the output cadence defined applies to both Output A and B.

Q6. What happens if I have some 720 50P/59/60 material with a 2:2 cadence and I set
the input cadence alignment to 2:2 F1/2 (PsF)?

A6. The Alchemist will use the field marker present in the timecode due to the absence of an
F sync in these standards. If there is no input timecode the 2:2 sequence will free run.

Q7. Why do I need the video blur control?

A7. Video blur is used to create a more naturalistic film originated look on video to film
conversions.

Q8. Can I use embedded audio when I select a SlowPAL output format (625 23.98PsF
and 625 24PsF)?

A8. Yes the embedded audio will be present but it will be 48KHz. In addition all AES outputs
will also be 48KHz.

Q9. Can I use embedded audio when I select a SlowPAL input format (625 23.98PsF and
625 24PsF)?

A9. Yes the system will accept embedded audio from a SlowPAL source however it must be
48KHz. If Slow audio in is required we recommend the use of AES.

Q10. When might I need to bias the sequence detector?

A10. The Bias control is useful when converting material that does not contain a clear motion
signature. This can occur for many reasons, such as:

• Severely intercut film, varispeed or video.Film containing overlaid or transparent video


effects/graphics.

• Excessively enhanced or compressed clips.

• Film originated source with field (video) based noise.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 166 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com FilmTools

Q11. Is it possible to force F1 or F2 cuts whilst simultaneously forcing an output


cadence?

A11. No, forced cuts and forced output cadence are mutually exclusive. A forced 2:3 output
for example would by definition contain sequence changes on both a F1 and a F2. With
FilmTools enabled the output cadence must be set to OFF if forced cuts are required.

Q12. Can the MC Interpolate mode be used with 59.94 2:3 input cadences?

A12. The MC Interpolate conversion mode is only available for film inputs which have a 2:2
cadence. If there is a requirement to convert from 1080 59i with a 2:3 cadence to 1080 50PsF
then it is recommended that this conversion is achieved using a two pass process. The 1080
59i with 2:3 cadence should first be converted to 1080 23.98PsF, followed by a secondary
conversion to 1080 25PsF.

Q13. When I perform a low frame rate conversion (such as 1080 23.98 PsF) to a high
frame rate (such as 1080 50i) the output of the Alchemist seems to phase between a 2:2
(film) cadence and a 1:1 (video) cadence. Why is this?

A13. This phenomenon occurs as the phase of the input and output video run through. In the
example used (1080 23.98PsF > 1080 50i) the cadence moves smoothly between pseudo 2:2
and 1:1 cadence every second. This repetition rate will vary depending on the frame rate
conversion undertaken.

Q14. When I perform a low frame conversion (such as 1080 23.98 PsF > 1080 25PsF) I
get a different result with V6.0.0. Why is this?

A14. This is because the behavior of Auto mode has been modified with the introduction of
MC Interpolate. All 2:2 to 2:2 cadence conversions will use MC Interpolate as default. If the
old behavior is desired the Film control should be set to Interpolate.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 167 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com FilmTools

D.9 FilmTools Glossary


2:2 F1/F2 A film frame being transported as 2:2 (PsF) is placed into two
consecutive video fields. F1/F2 denotes that the film frame is carried in
a field one and the following field two. This is commonly referred to
“normal dominance” or “perfect cadence”. See PsF.

2:2 F2/F1 A film frame being transported as 2:2 (PsF) is placed into two
consecutive video fields. F2/F1 denotes that the film frame is carried in
a field two and the following field one. This is commonly referred to
“reverse dominance” or “reverse cadence”. See PsF.

2:3 Datum Term used to assist in defining a FilmTools conversion on the


Timecode Alchemist Ph.C - HD. The 2:3 Datum Timecode identifies a specific
frame for which the user can specify an associated phase of 2:3
cadence (see 2:3 Datum Cadence).

2:3 Pulldown A telecine uses a technique called 2:3 pulldown (sometimes also called
3:2 pulldown) to convert Film from 23.98Hz to 59.94Hz videotape. For
every 4 frames of film there are 5 frames of 59.94 video. The telecine
alternately places 1 film frame across 2 fields, the next across 3, the
next across 2 and so on.

Aliasing An artifact associated with sampled signals. This undesirable effect is


caused by sampling frequencies being too low to faithfully reproduce
the frequencies present in the original signal.

Animation Any content with a frame rate of 12Hz or below where the cadence may
have no regular pattern.

Aperture The characteristic frequency response of a filter which describes the


effects on a signal being processed by that filter.

Cadence The pattern of video fields that create a net frame rate lower than the
video frame rate that carries them.

Cadence The cadence window defines a 24 hour period of time used to define
Window the behavior of the 2:3 Timecode Datum calculations. The window
definition and input timecode will define whether the 2:3 Datum
Cadence is extrapolated backwards or forwards from the 2:3 Datum
Timecode. This concept is only applicable to the 2:3 Datum Cadence
feature.

Clean frames Output fields or frames are derived directly from a single input frame
with no interpolation.

Content Type Content can fall into a variety of types based on its properties. In the
FilmTools context type categories include 2:2, 2:3, varispeed,
animation and video.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 168 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com FilmTools

DEFT Historically DEFT represents a motion artifact free conversion from


NTSC film originated video material to PAL. The post production trend
is to shoot material on film (24Hz) and then perform a telecine transfer
to videotape (59.94/2:3). A DEFT conversion process takes this 2:3
material, detects the sequence and eliminates the redundant field in a 3
field frame, and can therefore produce PAL images at a frame rate of
23.98Hz. This video is recorded on a specially modified PAL VTR. The
23.98 to 25Hz frame shift is achieved by replaying the material back on
a standard VTR. In more recent times this process has been applied to
the HD domain as well i.e. 1080 59.94i 2:3 to 1080 23.98PsF.

DEFTplus The content targeted at the DEFT conversions evolved over time.
Material soon contained both film and video elements cut together
throughout a program. This content required a 2 pass conversion. One
through a DEFT, and the other through an Alchemist. The results would
then be edited together to provide the optimum conversion. DEFTplus
offers optimal handling of the video content as well as the film
originated content by switching seamlessly from a DEFT conversion to
a video conversion on a shot by shot basis. Source video movement at
59.94Hz can be converted to movement at 47.95HZ using Ph.C Motion
Compensation. Alternatively the video elements can by converted to
24Hz (Video to film) to maintain a consistent frame based appearance.

Discontinuous It is common for the editing process to be performed post telecine.


2:3 Sequence When editing is performed to 2:3 there is a potential for disruptions in
the 2:3 sequence. These can be 3 field sequences adjacent to other 3
field sequences, and 2 field sequences adjacent to other 2 field
sequences. Also there are cases where we have single fields present
that are not part of any sequence (Orphan fields). These disruptions
caused by editing create a “broken 2:3 sequence”.

Field Defines whether a field 1 or field 2 represents the first field of a


Dominance progressive frame. See also 2:2 F1/F2 & 2:2 F2/F1.

Film Any content with a net frame rate of 30Hz or below.

Input Trigger Term used when defining a timecode conversion. The input trigger is
the value of the input timecode that defines when an output timecode
event occurs.

Interpolation The process of deriving new samples from a two or more source
samples.

Interpolation The process of deriving new samples from a two or more source
(Spatial) samples associated with the same point in time but different points in
space. In the context of video, by using different lines and pixels from
the same field or frame.

Interpolation The process of deriving new samples from a two or more source
(Temporal) samples associated with the same point in space but different points in
time. In the context of video, by using pixels from the subsequent fields
or frames.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 169 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com FilmTools

Mixed Cadence Content that contains two or more different cadences occurring
concurrently in different regions of the image. Typical examples include
film content with overlaid interlaced captions or film content derived
from two different sources (with different cadences).

Mixed Content Generic term used to define content which could contain mixed
cadence or content that changes type or cadence over time. See
Content Type

Mixed Media See Mixed Content.

Orphan Field See Discontinuous 2:3 Sequence.

P-Film This process offers all the advantages of DEFTplus for 50Hz mixed
media sources.

PsF A Progressive Segmented Frame (PsF) format splits a progressive


image into two sequential fields. It is identical to 2:2 in terms of motion
profile.

Sequence This is the act of finding film frame boundaries. For “perfect” PsF or 2:3
Detection sequences, this will produce a regular pattern of frames. For
“non-perfect” sequences the pattern will not be regular and might have
discontinuities at edit points for example.

Synchronize Temporal conversion without the use of interpolation. If input and


output field or frame rates are not identical then field or frame drops or
repeats must occur.

Varispeed Refers to film originated material which has been played off speed. For
example, speed up could be performed by dropping the third field in a
three field frame.

Video Any content with motion portrayal at a frequency greater than 30 Hz.

Video-to-Film Video-to-Film processing is the conversion of video (interlaced / field


based formats) to frame based formats (e.g. 2:2 / PsF.

Video Blur Technique used during the Video-to-Film process to modify temporal
processing to create a more naturalistic film originated look.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 170 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Dolby E Authoring

Appendix E. Dolby E Authoring

E.1 Overview
The Dolby®E Authoring option for Alchemist Ph.C-HD is capable of providing encoding,
transcoding and decoding for up to two Dolby®E audio streams, without impacting on the
processing of other PCM audio channels. Set up and control is integrated with the existing
user interface through simple, easy to use control screens or RollCall remote control.

The Dolby®E Authoring option offers the ability to encode and author Dolby®E from PCM with
full support for the associated metadata.

Metadata can be configured with ease – commonly used metadata sets can be stored in
global memories and/or specific metadata memories to assist efficient processing.

To complement this comprehensive Dolby processing, the Alchemist Ph.C-HD includes an


integrated multi-channel routing and processing module offering the capability to route, delay
and gain all audio inputs and decoded outputs simultaneously. This flexibility continues
through to the audio outputs where all audio sources maybe routed independently to the
embedder A, embedder B and AES.

For monitoring the newly authored Dolby®E it is possible to route the Dolby®E to the Dolby®E
decoder. The decoded PCM may be monitored on the headphones socket or routed to the
audio outputs. Decoded metadata is presented per program in a single screen shot allowing
fast validation that the metadata was correctly configured during encoding.

E.1.1 Features

• Dolby®E processing integrated with converter; no need to setup and configure exter-
nal boxes.

• Dolby®E processing available in all conversion modes.

• Frame rate standards conversion as well as up, down and cross conversion modes.

• Transcode, Decode, Encode.

• Easy set up, intuitive GUI minimizes time to perform jobs.

• Lip-sync maintained, guard band protected: no more rejects.

• Full support for metadata authoring.

• Flexible channel routing, gain and delay.

• Ability to independently map audio sources to embedder A, embedder B and AES.

• Headphones socket.

• Integrated BLITS audio tone generator.

• Powerful features to support metadata configuration.

• Dolby®D decode.

• Dolby®E external metadata processing available in all conversion.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 171 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Dolby E Authoring

E.2 Dolby® E Control Interface


The Alchemist Ph.C’s Dolby® E controls are contained within the Audio Menus. See “Audio
Menus” on page 61 for information.

E.3 Dolby Metadata


This section provides a brief description of the Dolby Metadata parameters. Detailed
explanations can be found on the Dolby Web site www.dolby.com.

In general when authoring Dolby the important parameters are Program Configuration,
Dialogue Norm, Line Mode and Preferred Stereo Downmix. Other parameters are normally
left in preset.

E.3.1 Audio Production Info


• No/Yes: This parameter indicates whether Mix Level and Room Type values are
valid.

• Mix Level: This parameter can only be adjusted if the ‘Audio Production’ is set to
‘Yes’. The Mix Level describes the peak sound pressure level (SPL) used during the
final mixing at the studio, and allows the consumer’s amplifier to set its volume such
that the SPL in the replay environment matches that of the studio. This control oper-
ates in addition to dialog level and is best thought of as the final volume setting on the
consumer’s equipment.

• Room Type: This parameter can only be adjusted if the ‘Audio Production’ is set to
‘Yes’. The Room Type parameter describes the equalization used during the final mix-
ing session at the studio.

• None: No equalization

• Large: X-curve equalization

• Small: Flat equalization

E.3.2 Bitstream Mode


This universal metadata parameter describes the nature of the encoded program material.

• Complete Main: From 2 to 6 channels with all content.

• Music and Effects: Main source without the dialog channel. Usually associated with
a separate Dialog program.

• Visually Impaired: 1 channel containing a narrative description of an associated


video channel.

• Hearing Impaired: 1 channel containing all content processed for increased


intelligibility.

• Dialog: 1 or 2 channels containing dialog. Usually associated with a separate Music


and Effects program.

• Commentary: 1 channel with supplementary commentary.

• Emergency: 1 channel for emergency messages with priority to mute all other pro-
grams.

• Voice Over: A single channel to be decoded and mixed with the centre channel.

• Karaoke: Left and right channels have music. Centre channel has a guide melody. L’s
and R’s have optional backing vocals.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 172 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Dolby E Authoring

E.3.3 Center Mix Level


When the encoded audio has three front channels (L, C, R), but the consumer has only two
front speakers (left and right), this parameter indicates the nominal downmix level for the
Center channel with respect to the Left and Right channels. Decoders use this universal
metadata parameter during downmixing in Lo/Ro mode when Extended Bitstream Information
parameters are not active.

E.3.4 Channel Mode


The Channel Mode displays which channels will exist in the Dolby®D program. Channel
mode is expressed as n/m (e.g. 3/2), where n is the number of front channels and m is the
number of back channels. Additionally, there may be a Low Frequency Effects (LFE) channel
added. LFE is sometimes called a subwoofer channel.

E.3.5 Dialogue Norm.


Dialog normalization employs a level shift to enable the average level of dialog to be
maintained at a preset level. This aids in matching audio volume between program sources.
Use the slider bar to set the Dialog Normalization level.

E.3.6 DC Filter
This parameter indicates whether the DC-blocking 3Hz highpass filter is applied to the main
input channels of the program.

E.3.7 LFE Channel


This parameter indicates that the LFE Channel is present in this program.

E.3.8 LFE Filter


This parameter determines whether a 120 Hz eighth-order lowpass filter is applied to the LFE
channel input of an encoder prior to encoding. It is ignored if the LFE channel is disabled. This
parameter is not sent to the consumer decoder. The filter removes frequencies above 120 Hz
that would cause aliasing when decoded. This filter should only be switched off if the audio to
be encoded is known to have no signal above 120 Hz.

E.3.9 Lowpass Filter


This parameter determines whether a lowpass filter is applied to the main input channels of a
Dolby encoder prior to encoding. This filter removes high frequency signals that are not
encoded. At the suitable data rates, this filter operates above 20 kHz. In all cases it prevents
aliasing on decoding and is normally switched on. This parameter is not passed to the
consumer decoder.

E.3.10 Line Mode


This parameter is also often referred to as Dynamic Range Control or DynRng. Line-level or
power-amplified outputs from two-channel set-top decoders, two channel digital televisions,
5.1-channel digital televisions, Dolby Digital A/V surround decoders, and outboard adapters
use Line Mode.

E.3.11 LoRo Center Downmix


This parameter indicates the level shift applied to the Center channel when adding to the left
and right outputs as a result of downmixing to an Lo/Ro output. When Extended BSI
parameters are active, this parameter replaces the Center Mix Level parameter in the
universal parameters.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 173 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Dolby E Authoring

E.3.12 LoRo Surround Downmix


This parameter indicates the level shift applied to the Surround channels when downmixing to
an Lo/Ro output. When Extended BSI parameters are active, this parameter replaces the
Surround Mix Level parameter in the universal parameters.

E.3.13 LtRt Center Downmix


This parameter indicates the level shift applied to the Center channel when adding to the left
and right outputs as a result of downmixing to an Lt/Rt output.

E.3.14 LtRt Surround Downmix


This parameter indicates the nominal downmix level.

E.3.15 Preferred Stereo Downmix


This parameter allows the producer to select either the Lt/Rt or the Lo/Ro downmix in a
consumer decoder that has stereo outputs. The options are:

• Not Indicated.

• LtRt Preferred: The Lt/Rt downmix is prologic encoded so that the output contains
centre and surround information that can be decoded by a prologic decoder.

• LoRo Preferred: The Lo/Ro downmix adds the Left and Right Surround channels
discretely to the Left and Right speaker channels, respectively. This preserves the
stereo separation for stereo-only monitoring and produces a mono-compatible signal.

E.3.16 Program Description


Each Dolby®E program may be given a name or description using this field. Descriptions may
be up to 19 characters in length.

E.3.17 RF Mode
RF mode is designed for products (such as set-top boxes) that generate a downmixed signal
for connection to the RF/antenna input of a television set; however, it is also useful in
situations where heavy dynamic range control is required—for example, when small PC
speakers are used for DVD playback. In RF mode, high- and low-level compression scaling is
not allowed. When RF mode is active, that compression profile is always fully applied.

E.3.18 Surr 3dB Attenuator


This option determines whether the encoder attenuates the surround channel(s) by 3 dB
before encoding. It balances the signal levels between theatrical mixing rooms (dubbing
stages) and consumer mixing rooms (DVD or TV studios). Consumer mixing rooms calibrate
all five main channels are at the same sound pressure level, whereas theatrical mixing rooms
calibrate the surround channels 3 dB lower than the front channels.

E.3.19 Surround Ex Mode


The Dolby Surround EX™ mode indicates whether or not the program has been encoded in
Dolby Surround EX. This information is not used by the Dolby decoder, but may be used by
other portions of the audio reproduction equipment.

E.3.20 Surround Mix Level


When the encoded audio has one or more Surround channels, but the consumer does not
have surround speakers, this parameter indicates the nominal downmix level for the Surround
channel(s) with respect to the Left and Right front channels. Decoders use this universal
metadata parameter during downmixing in Lo/Ro mode when Extended BSI parameters are
not active.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 174 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Dolby E Authoring

E.3.21 Surround Mode


This universal metadata parameter indicates to a Dolby Digital decoding product that also
contains a Dolby Pro Logic decoder (for example a 5.1-channel amplifier), whether or not the
two-channel encoded bitstream contains a Dolby Surround (Lt/Rt) program that requires Pro
Logic decoding. Decoders can use this flag to automatically switch on Pro Logic decoding as
required.

• Not indicated: Dolby Surround not indicated

• Not Dolby Surround: Not Dolby Surround encoded

• Dolby Surround: Dolby Surround encoded

E.3.22 Surround Phase Shift


Can be decoded with Dolby Pro Logic to L, C, R, S, if desired. However, for some
phase-critical material (such as music) this phase shift is audible when listening in a
5.1-channel format.

E.4 Operational Examples

E.4.1 Operational Example 1


Dolby® E conversion from 1080 50i to 1080 59.94i

Dolby®E Program Config 5.1+2 embedded on Emb 1

Dolby®E 5.1+2 required on all audio outputs pair 1

• Simple Transcode required

• Audio channel configuration remains the same

• No new Metadata needs to be authored

• Fixed channel mapping from decoder to encoder required

Audio Setup

1. Select Audio Tab.

2. Touch Audio Control.

3. Select Dolby Encoder 1 page and set Encoder 1 mode to Transcode.

4. Select Dolby Decoder 1 page and set Source to Emb 1.

5. Return to the Audio Control page.

6. Lock audio outputs together by selecting AES follows EMB A and EMB B follows
EMB A.

7. Select output pair 1 to Enc 1.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 175 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Dolby E Authoring

E.4.2 Operational Example 2


Dolby® E Author to 1080 59.94i

Multi channel PCM presented on AES 1-4

Dolby®E 5.1+2 required on output Emb A

Metadata should be set to Dolby Default values

• Audio channel configuration remains the same

• Metadata needs to be authored, but simply set to Dolby recommended defaults.

• Fixed channel mapping from AES to encoder required.

Audio Setup

1. Select Audio Tab.

2. Touch Audio Control.

3. Select Dolby Encoder 1 page and set encode mode to Author.

4. Touch map AES 1-4 button for single step routing configuration.

5. Select a Bit Depth of 20 bit.

6. Select program configuration to 5.1+2.

7. Return to Audio control page.

8. Touch Preset to ensure Dolby default values are used.

9. Select Audio Control page and Emb A tab.

10. Select Emb A pair 1 to Enc 1.

E.4.3 Operational Example 3


Dolby® E conversion from 1080 59.94i to 1080 50i

Dolby®E 5.1 presented on Emb 1

Stereo mix presented on AES 1 (to be encoded onto Program 2)

Dolby®E 5.1+2 required on Emb A

Prog 1 metadata should be passed through from the decoder

Prog 2 metadata should be authored with Dolby Default values

Mixture of decoded and authored metadata required

Author mode required

Audio Setup

1. Select Audio Tab.

2. Touch Audio Control.

3. Select Dolby Encoder 1 page and set encode mode to Author.

4. Select Dolby Decoder 1 page and set Source to Emb 1.

5. Select Full Metdata.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 176 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Dolby E Authoring

6. Play a segment of source where Dolby®E is present, confirm decoded metadata


parameters have updated and then snapshot the decoded Metadata into Snapshot 1.

7. Go back to Audio Control page and select Dolby Encoder 1 page.

8. Set Bit Depth to 20 bit.

9. Return to the Audio Control page.

10. Select program configuration to 5.1+2. Touch Preset to ensure Dolby default values
are used.

11. Manually route decoder 1 outputs to encoder input channels 1 – 6.

12. Manually route AES 1 channels to encoder input channels 7 and 8.

13. Select Metadata Authoring, followed by Prog 1 tab.

14. Recall Snapshot 1 (this will load settings for Prog 1 only)

15. Select Prog 2 tab and modify metadata as required.

16. Return to the Audio Control Page and select the Emb A tab and Route Enc 1 to
Emb 1.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 177 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Dolby E Authoring

E.4.4 Operational Example 4


Dolby® E Author to 1080 59.94i

8 channels of PCM presented on AES 1-4

Channels 1&2 have been incorrectly swapped upstream

Dolby®E 8x1 required on Emb A

Metadata needs to be specifically set according to customer delivery spec

User wants to verify the encoder is set up correctly whilst performing the conversion

Author mode required

Manual configuration of Metadata

Monitor newly encoded Dolby®E using one of the decoders

Audio Setup

1. Select Audio Tab.

2. Touch Audio Control.

3. Select Dolby Encoder 1 page and set encode mode to Author.

4. Set Bit Depth to 20 bit.

5. Select program configuration to 8X1.

6. Return to the Audio Control page.

7. Touch map AES 1-4 button for single step routing configuration, manually re-route
AES 1 Ch1 to encoder input 2 and AES 1 Ch 2 to encoder input 1.

8. Select Dolby Encoder 1.

9. Select Metadata Authoring and configure all 8 programs (if the metadata for each
program is the same use the Snapshot tool).

10. Select Dolby Decoder 1 page and set the source to Enc 1.

11. Return to the Audio Control page and select Emb A tab and Route Enc 1 to Emb 1.

Decoded metadata may now be monitored and validated during authoring process.

E.5 Dolby Metadata and Memories


There are 6 user global memories plus 8 metadata program Snapshots available.

Global memories store the Alchemist’s current configuration, including Dolby configuration
and associated metadata for each program present with the current Dolby configuration.

Metadata Snapshots allow the user to store and recall specific program metadata
configurations (this doesn’t include Program Configuration and Bit Depth). These can be
saved from the decoder or the encoder as required. For Snapshot behavior see Using
Metadata Snapshots on page 182

Snapshots will be erased if a Factory memory recall is performed.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 178 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Dolby E Authoring

E.6 Metadata Parameter ‘Default’


The Program Configuration defines the quantity of programs present (as shown below).

Program Config No. of Programs

5.1 + 2 2

5.1 + 2x1 3

4+4 2

4 + 2x2 3

4 + 2 + 2x1 4

4 + 4x1 5

4x2 4

3x2 + 2x1 5

2x2 + 4x1 6

2 + 6x1 7

8x1 8

5.1 1

4+2 2

4 + 2x1 3

3x2 3

2x2 + 2x1 4

2 + 4x1 5

6x1 6

4 1

2+2 2

2 + 2x1 3

4x1 4

7.1 1

7.1 screen 1

For each program there are metadata default values (based on the associated Program
Configuration). These default values are the default values recommended by Dolby.If
required the user may modify these defaults independently of each program. Any modification
made will be retained until either:

• The user makes subsequent modifications

• The metadata Preset is selected

• Global Default or Factory memories are recalled

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 179 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Dolby E Authoring

E.7 Which Metadata Parameters Are User Configurable?


Parameters which are not user-configurable are grayed out in the table below. In some cases
the CAT559 will force a defined behavior and in other cases there is an implicit dependency.

E.7.1 Dolby®E
Bit Depth Yes

Program Configuration Yes

Dolby Frame Rate No (defined by selected video output)

E.7.2 Dolby®D (AC3)


Channel mode No (defined by program configuration)

Dialogue Level Yes

LFE Channel Yes

Bitstream Mode Yes

Line Mode Pro Yes

Program Description Yes

RF Mode Pro Yes

RF Overmodulation Prot No (forced 'Enabled')

Center Downmix Level No (follows Lo/Ro Center)

Surround Downmix Level No (follows Lo/Ro Surround)

Dolby Surround Mode Not Indicated

Audio Production Yes

Mixing Level Yes (when 'Audio Production' is set 'Yes')

Room Type Yes (when 'Audio Production' is set 'Yes')

Copyright Bit No (forced 'Yes')

Original Bitstream No (forced 'Yes')

DC Filter Yes

Lowpass Filter Yes

LFE Lowpass Filter Yes

Surround 3dB Attenuation Yes

Surround Phase Shift Yes

Preferred Stereo Downmix Yes

Lt/Rt Center Downmix Level Yes

Lt/Rt Surround Downmix Level Yes

Lo/Ro Center Downmix Level Yes

Lo/Ro Surround Downmix Level Yes

Surround EX Mode Yes

A/D Convertor Type No (forced 'Standard')

Datarate No (forced '384kbs')

Headphone Mode No (forced 'Not Indicated')

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 180 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Dolby E Authoring

E.8 Metadata Workflow

Does the conversion


require Dolby Authoring
or Transcoding?

Authoring Transcoding

Set Encode Mode to


Set Encode Mode to
‘Author’.
‘Transcode’. Metadata will
Do you wish to use
be passed from Decoder
Metadata from the
to Encoder†
Decoder?

Yes No

Navigate to the Encoder


Repeat Navigate to the Decoder
page, select the desired
page, select the desired
program configuration and
program and ‘Snapshot’
manually configure the
the Metadata
Metadata

Snapshot load behaviour


Navigate to the Encoder
page and select the Step 1
desired output program Encoder program config is selected. Internal Metadata
configuration. Select the Behaviour processor will set all params in all valid programs to
required program and default settings
load snapshot Step 2
Snapshot load is initiated. If the captured param values
are valid for the specified internal program configuration
and current program selection the internal metadata set
will be updated with the value from the Snapshot.
Step 3
If the Internal Metadata set contains a param which was
Are there any other NOT present in the Snapshot it will remain at the default*
Metadata sets available in setting.
the source that might
assist in internal Metadata Step 4
configuration? If the Snapshot contains a param which is not present in
the internal Metadata set this param will be disregarded.
Yes No

Configure remaining
Repeat process for other program Metadata sets
program Metadata sets manually or leave as
Dolby presets

† The output frame rate Metadata parameter will be modified in accordance with the output standard selection.

* Default settings can be either system preset values (as specified by Dolby) OR user defined ‘default’ values. (Users can modify the
system preset values for each program configuration – these settings will be stored during a power cycle).

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 181 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Dolby E Authoring

E.8.1 Using Metadata Snapshots


For demonstration purposes let’s assume the Decoder has a 5.1 input and the Metadata has
been captured using the Snapshot feature.

Example: 5.1 metadata snapshot

Channel mode (3/2)

Dialogue Level -27

LFE Channel Enabled

Bitstream Mode Complete Main (CM)

Line Mode Pro Film Standard

Program Description

RF Mode Pro Film Standard

RF Overmodulation Prot Enabled

Center Downmix Level 0.5

Surround Downmix Level 0.595

Dolby Surround Mode Not Indicated

Audio Production Yes

Mixing Level 90

Room Type Large

Copyright Bit Yes

Original Bitstream Yes

DC Filter Enabled

Lowpass Filter Enabled

LFE Lowpass Filter Enabled/Disabled

Surround 3dB Attenuation Disabled

Surround Phase Shift Enabled

Preferred Stereo Downmix Not Indicated

Lt/Rt Center Downmix Level 0.5

Lt/Rt Surround Downmix Level 0.595

Lo/Ro Center Downmix Level 0.5

Lo/Ro Surround Downmix Level 0.595

Surround EX Mode Not Indicated

A/D Convertor Type Standard

Datarate 384kbs

Headphone Mode Not Indicated

The user has specified a 20bit, 8x1 program configuration and has selected program 1 for
configuration.

As described in the Metadata Workflow section the internal metadata set (all 8 programs) will
be set to default values.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 182 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Dolby E Authoring

The user now loads the Snapshot.

The table below indicates the contents of the Snapshot, the 8x1 program configuration default
values (for program 1) , the value of the Metadata parameters post Snapshot load and
whether the internal default value has been updated by the Snapshot. If a parameter wasn’t
updated there is an explanation as to why it wasn’t appropriate to do so.

Metadata Captured Post Snapshot Parameter updated

Parameter Snapshot Load by Snapshot?

Channel mode (3/2) (1/0) (1/0)

Dialogue Level -32 -27 -32

LFE Channel Enabled Disabled Disabled

Bitstream Mode Complete Main (CM) Complete Main (CM) Complete Main (CM)

Line Mode Pro Film Standard Film Standard Film Standard

Program Description Test Test

RF Mode Pro Film Standard Film Standard Film Standard

RF Overmodulation Prot Enabled Enabled Enabled

Center Downmix Level 0.5 0.707 0.707

Surround Downmix Level 0.595 0.707 0.707

Dolby Surround Mode Not Indicated Not Indicated Not Indicated

Audio Production Yes No Yes

Mixing Level 90 80 90

Room Type Large Not Indicated Large

Copyright Bit Yes Yes Yes

Original Bitstream Yes Yes Yes

DC Filter Enabled Enabled Enabled

Lowpass Filter Enabled Enabled Enabled

LFE Lowpass Filter Enabled Enabled Enabled

Surround 3dB Attenuation Disabled Disabled Disabled

Surround Phase Shift Enabled Disabled Enabled

Preferred Stereo Downmix Not Indicated Not Indicated Not Indicated

Lt/Rt Center Downmix


0.5 0.707 0.707
Level

Lt/Rt Surround Downmix


0.595 0.707 0.707
Level

Lo/Ro Center Downmix


0.5 0.707 0.707
Level

Lo/Ro Surround Downmix


0.595 0.707 0.707
Level

Surround EX Mode Not Indicated Not Indicated Not Indicated

A/D Convertor Type Standard Standard Standard

Datarate 384kbs 384kbs 384kbs

Headphone Mode Not Indicated Not Indicated Not Indicated

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 183 © 2011 Snell Limited


Issue 3 Rev 1
Alchemist Ph.C-HD

Tone and
Embedded audio
LFE
inputs
generators

Audio Rate
AES Converters
(X8)

Embedder/ Video Out A


Audio Rate Audio
Channel AES sources
Converters embedder A
(X8) Router
Video In A
Audio
E.9 Audio Block Diagram

disembed
Video In B
Channel based
Dolby gain/delay/mix Encoder 1 Dolby Dolby Audio Video Out B
Decoder 1 source Encoder 1 Aligner embedder B

Page 184
Encoder 2
source
Dolby Dolby
www.snellgroup.com

Decoder 2 Encoder 2
AES BNC AES BNC out
Decoder outputs Outputs

Metadata
Input processor
metadata Embedder A 1-8
Embedder B 1-8
AES out 1-8
Headphone
Encoder 1-2 out
Output
Decoder 1-2
Embedder In 1-8
AES In 1-8

Headphone
Source Headphone
Gain

©
Dolby E Authoring

2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Dolby E Authoring

E.10 Configuring Dolby®E Alignment


This decision chart illustrates the steps that are required to configure Dolby®E alignment.

Dolby®E configuration controls have been designed with system integration in mind. IP/OP
Alignment controls may be used to compensate for equipment up/downstream which
respects Dolby frames. Global/master delay and individual audio pair delay may be used in
addition to the alignment controls to allow sub frame lip-sync adjustments to be made.

To configure Dolby®E alignment:

Determine whether the input Dolby®E is co-timed, advanced, or delayed with respect to the
video and adjust the IP Alignment control accordingly.

Determine whether the output Dolby®E needs to be co-timed, advanced, or delayed with
respect to the video and adjust the OP Alignment control accordingly.

Correct any sub-frame lip-sync issues by adjusting either the master audio delay (if all
channels require the same adjustment) or the individual channel delay (if channels require
different levels of adjustment).

User sets i/p User sets o/p


Align to Align to
Yes “Co-timed” “Co-timed”

Is the Dolby E Yes Adjust master


co-timed with delay or
the video? Do you require
“Delayed” “Delayed” individual
the output
1080/50i User sets i/p
Dolby to be co-
User sets i/p channel delay
5.1 + 2 Emb 1 alignment to alignment to to compensate
timed with the
“delayed” “delayed” for any sub
No Is the Dolby video? Is the Dolby
advanced or advanced or
frame lipsync 1080/59.94i
issues.
delayed with delayed with 5.1 + 2 Emb 1
respect to the respect to the
video? video?
“Advanced” “Advanced”
User sets i/p User sets i/p
alignment to No alignment to
“advanced” “advanced”

INPUT ALIGNMENT OUTPUT ALIGNMENT


Advanced Dolby E Delayed Dolby E Advanced Dolby E Delayed Dolby E
Co-timed Cotimed
Dolby E Dolby E

-1 frame 0 Frame +1 Frame -1 frame 0 Frame +1 Frame

Time Time

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 185 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Dolby E Authoring

E.11 Calculating Dolby®E Audio Delay Transcoding


When dealing with Dolby®E, the total audio delay can be calculated as follows:

Total Audio Delay = System Delay + Dolby IP Alignment + Dolby OP Alignment + Master
Delay + Channel Delay.

One Off System Configuration User audio delay controls

† ‡
SYSTEM ‡ MASTER INDIVIDUAL
+ DOLBY INPUT ALIGNMENT + DOLBY OUTPUT ALIGNMENT + +
DELAY DELAY CH DELAY TOTAL
See Home screen Decoder + “Co- timed” = zero ip frame Encoder + “Co- timed” = zero op frame
Master delay control Individual output = AUDIO
or refer to Latency Applies to all audio pair offset DELAY
Decoder + “Delayed” = minus 1 ip frame Encoder + “Delayed” = plus 1 op frame
tables output pairs
Decoder + “Advanced”= plus 1 ip frame Encoder + “Advanced”= minus 1 op frame

= 1 Decoder module latency


“Decoder” refers to Dolby “Encoder” refers to Dolby Encoder module latency
input frame input frame

The current System Delay is shown on the Audio tab of the Alchemist Ph.C – HD Home
screen; the system delays for all of the Alchemist Ph.C-HD’s conversions are also listed in the
“Latency Tables” appendix of the Operator’s manual.

The Dolby Input Alignment and Dolby Output Alignment controls are dependant on any other
devices that are upstream and downstream of the Alchemist Ph.C – HD. These adjustments
will normally only be made once, when the Alchemist is first configured, or when upstream or
downstream devices are changed.

Finally, the master and individual channel delay controls are added to the other delay
sources. These are normally used to compensate for lip-sync issues and are more frequently
adjusted than the other delay sources.

The following three examples illustrate how audio delay would be calculated.

Example 1: 1080/50i to 1080/59i conversion (FilmTools “OFF – Min Delay “ON”), Dolby®E
Input is 1 frame delayed with respect to the video, Dolby®E Output should be advanced with
respect to the video, and a lip-sync error of +10ms is present.

One Off System Configuration User audio delay controls

† ‡
SYSTEM ‡ MASTER INDIVIDUAL
+ DOLBY INPUT ALIGNMENT + DOLBY OUTPUT ALIGNMENT + +
DELAY DELAY CH DELAY TOTAL
AUDIO
“DELAYED” “ADVANCED” DELAY
180ms + 10ms + 0ms
(1 x 1080/50i Frame = -40ms) (1 x 1080/59i Frame = -33ms) = 117ms

† There are five user controls which contribute to the System Delay value - input standard,
output standard, FilmTools (on/off), Min Delay (on/off), Synchro TC Conversion.

‡ Note: With the high rate 720P standards (such as 720 50/59/60P) one Dolby frame actually
equals two high rate 720P frames. E.g. One 720/50P Dolby Frame = 40ms.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 186 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Dolby E Authoring

Example 2: 1080/59i 2:3 to 1080/23PsF conversion, FilmTools “ON”, Dolby®E Input is


co-timed with respect to the video, Dolby®E Output should be delayed with respect to the
video, a lip-sync error of +8ms is present on pair 1 only.

One Off System Configuration User audio delay controls

† ‡
SYSTEM ‡ MASTER INDIVIDUAL
+ DOLBY INPUT ALIGNMENT + DOLBY OUTPUT ALIGNMENT + +
DELAY DELAY CH DELAY TOTAL
AUDIO
“CO-TIMED” “DELAYED” DELAY
278ms + 0ms + 8ms
(0 x 1080/59i Frame = 0ms) (1 x 1080/23PsF Frame = 42ms) = 328ms

Example 3: 525/59i to 720/59P conversion, Dolby®E Input is advanced with respect to the
video, Dolby®E Input should be delayed with respect to the video, no lip-sync error.

One Off System Configuration User audio delay controls

† ‡
SYSTEM ‡ MASTER INDIVIDUAL
+ DOLBY INPUT ALIGNMENT + DOLBY OUTPUT ALIGNMENT + +
DELAY DELAY CH DELAY TOTAL
AUDIO
“ADVANCED” “DELAYED” DELAY
152ms (2 x 720/59P Frame = 33ms) + 0ms + 0ms
(1 x 525/59i Frame = 33ms) See ‡ = 218ms

† There are five user controls which contribute to the System Delay value - input standard,
output standard, FilmTools (on/off), Min Delay (on/off), Synchro TC Conversion.

‡ Note: With the high rate 720P standards (such as 720 50/59/60P) one Dolby frame actually
equals two high rate 720P frames. E.g. One 720/50P Dolby Frame = 40ms.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 187 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Dolby E Authoring

E.12 BLITS Test Generator


BLITS is a set of tones designed for television multi track audio line up. BLITS tone has three
distinct sections as shown in the diagram below.

The first section (Phase 1) is made up from short tones at -18dBFS to identify each channel.

• Left and right- 880Hz

• Centre- 1320Hz

• LFE- 82.5Hz

• Left and right Surround

• - 660Hz

This channel identification section aids interpretation on a visual display and the spatial
sequence around the speakers also becomes recognizable very quickly.

The second section (Phase 2) identifies front left and right channels only using 1KHz at
-18dBFS tone. The left channel is interrupted four times whilst the right channel is constant.
This pattern of interrupts was selected to provide a ‘familiar’ signal to operators and avoids
confusion with the GLITS tone after stereo down mix.

The last section (Phase 3) has a 2KHz tone at -24dBFS on all six channels. This provides a
phase check capability and when summed to stereo using default down-mix values should
produce tones approximately -18dBFS on each channel.

When the BLITS test tone is enabled the user can define whether they would like Phase 1,
Phase 2, Phase 3 or All phases in sequence. This is configured with the system setup.

BLITS 5.1 Ident

880 1KHz 2KHz

880 1KHz 2KHz

1320 2KHz

82.5 2KHz

660 2KHz

660 2KHz

4.8 Secs 5.4 Secs 3.2 Secs

Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3

Total Sequence Duration = 13.4 secs


(Not to scale)

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 188 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Dolby E Authoring

E.13 Questions & Answers


Q1. Can I encode PCM to Dolby®E?

A1. Yes, simply set the Encode Mode to “Author” and begin authoring Dolby®E. Metadata can
be set to Dolby recommended defaults or may be tailored to individual applications.

Q2. Is it possible to re-order the channel configuration of the Dolby®E program i.e.
2+5.1 to 5.1+2?

A2. Yes, the Alchemist offers comprehensive channel level routing, gain and delay controls.

Q3. Is it possible to have different Audio sources embedded on the same channel of
Emb A, Emb B and AES?

A3. Yes. Assuming the audio output lock has been disabled, the user may configure Emb A,
Emb B and AES completely independently.

Q4. What happens if the Dolby®E frame rate is different to the input video frame rate?

A4. The Alchemist will decode the Dolby®E (whatever the frame rate is) and re-encode it to
make a Dolby compliant bitstream at the specified output frame rate. All embedded audio
(PCM/Data or Dolby®E) must be 48KHz and clock synchronous with the video. This feature
could be used to repair a program which had previously been converted in data mode.

Q5. What happens if I give the Alchemist Dolby®E which is out of the guard band?

A5. The Alchemist will automatically re-align and output Dolby compliant data.

Q6. What happens if my program switches from Dolby®E to PCM?

A6. The Alchemist will automatically detect the loss of Dolby®E and indicate the presence of
PCM. The PCM will be routed through the same path to the output without user intervention.

Q7. Can the Alchemist act as a Dolby®E test generator?

A7. Yes, tones may be generated in either “Author” mode or “Transcode” mode. In Author
mode the user is responsible for configuring the Dolby program. In Transcode mode the
Dolby configuration is dictated by the decoder (program config and Metadata are passed
through). BLITS and 1KHz/4KHz -18dBFS/-20dBFS tones are available. Where a LFE
channel is present a 100Hz tone will be generated.

Q8. Why can you not use gain when performing a Dolby Transcode?

A8. Dolby®E content has been mastered with care, and the associated Metadata reflects the
way this Dolby®E has been created. Altering the gain of the audio within the Dolby®E
bit-stream may render the Metadata inaccurate. It is of course possible to adjust the gain if
you enter “Author” mode. In this mode the user is responsible for ensuring content and
Metadata are correct.

Q9. Can I use Dolby®E when I select a SlowPAL output format (625 23.98PsF and 625
24PsF)?

A9. Yes the Dolby®E will be present on both the embedded and AES but it will be 48KHz.

Q10. Can I use Dolby®E when I select a SlowPAL input format (625 23.98PsF and 625
24PsF)?

A10. Yes the system will accept either AES or Embedded if the source is 48KHz. If Slow
audio is required we recommend the use of AES.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 189 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Dolby E Authoring

Q11. How will Dolby®E be aligned with a 720 50/59P video output?

A11. The Dolby®E will be aligned correctly to alternate 720P frames. If a specific alignment is
desired, the Alchemist should be provided with an interlaced reference source, OR the 720P
output should be allocated to the secondary output, and an interlaced format should be
selected on the primary – in this case, the Dolby®E will be aligned with the interlaced frame
structure.

Q12. Can I fix Dolby®E lip-sync problems?

A12. Yes, positive or negative delay may be added via the global delay and/or the individual
channel delay controls.

Q13. Can I accommodate the frame latency of the encoder before the Alchemist?

A13. Yes, this can be accommodated easily, through the use of the IP Alignment control. This
control allows the user to specify whether the incoming Dolby®E is Co-timed/Delayed or
advanced by 1 frame with respect to the video. Note that there is also an Output Alignment
control to aid integration with downstream equipment.

Q14. Will the AES decoded outputs be aligned with Embedded Dolby®E bitstream?

A14. Yes they will, although AES outputs will always be aligned with Output A, i.e. if Output B
genlock offset is adjusted the timing will be different to A and the AES outputs. In addition if
the “Monitor” AES feature is enabled, the AES timing will be advanced on the Embedded
channels as this feature is intended to monitor the input decoded PCM.

Q15. How is the Dolby®E bitstream aligned if my primary and secondary outputs have
different genlock offsets?

A15. The Dolby®E will remain aligned to the specified genlock offsets in both outputs. Note
that the AES outputs will be aligned to the primary video output (A), and therefore may be
offset relative to the secondary.

Q16. Does the Alchemist decode Dolby®D?

A16. The Alchemist will automatically detect the presence of Dolby®D and allow it to be
decoded to PCM.

Q17. Is it possible to decode Dolby®D and Encode it as Dolby®E?

A17. Yes this is technically possible, however Dolby®D is an emissive standard which is only
intended to be decoded by the consumer. Multiple decode/encode cycles will impair the audio
quality.

Q18. Is it possible to ingest Metadata which has been Authored externally to the
Alchemist?

A18. Yes Metadata authored on external units (such as the DP570/571) can be directly
encoded into the Alchemist's output Dolby®E bitstream.

Q19. If Metadata is ingested through the external metadata connections does the
Alchemist validate the metadata prior to encoding?

A19. No, external metadata bypasses the internal metadata processor and is encoded
directly into the output Dolby®E bitstream (unless the Snapshot feature is used).

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 190 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Dolby E Authoring

E.14 Glossary
Authoring Describes the act of encoding PCM to Dolby®E and creating the
associated metadata.

BLITS Black and Lane Ident Tone System.

Decoding Decoding describes the act of decoding Dolby®D/E to PCM.

Dolby®D Dolby®D (sometimes referred to as AC-3) is a multichannel audio


compression standard developed to bring theatre quality sound into the
home.

Dolby®E A professional audio data-stream designed to carry up to 8 channels of


audio, metadata and timecode on stereo PCM systems.

Downmixing Downmixing is a function of Dolby®Digital that allows a multichannel


program to be reproduced over fewer speaker channels than the
numbers for which the program is optimally intended.

Encoding Encoding describes the act of encoding PCM to Dolby®E.

GLITS Graham’s Line up Ident Tone System.

Guard Band The guard band refers to the number of audio sample locations that do
not contain Dolby®E data. The guard band is intended to be aligned
with the editing and switching areas so that edits and switches may
occur without the loss or corruption of Dolby®E data.

Metadata Inserted during program creation or mastering and is carried through


transmission in a broadcast application or directly onto a consumer
format. Metadata provides capability for content producers to deliver
the highest quality audio to consumers in a range of listening
environments. It also provides choices that allow the consumer to
adjust their settings to best suit their listening environment.

Metadata A mechanism to store and recall metadata parameters contained in a


Snapshot single program.

Transcode/ Dolby®E Transcoding is the act of converting Dolby®E from one frame
Transcoding rate to another.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 191 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com SNMP

Appendix F. SNMP

F.1 Overview
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is a protocol within the TCP/IP suite and,
because of the popularity of TCP/IP, SNMP has become the de facto standard for managing
data networks.

SNMP is a simple request / response protocol that communicates information values between
two types of software entities:

• SNMP Managers (also called SNMP Applications or NMS – Network Management


Systems)

• SNMP Agents (also called Elements, Devices or Units)

The information available from an SNMP agent is defined by sets of files called Management
Information Base or MIB.

Features:

• Receives SNMPV1 & SNMPV2

• Generates SNMPV2 Notifications (rather than SNMPV1 Trap)

F.2 How SNMP Works


In principle there are two basic commands that an SNMP Manager application uses to
manage an SNMP Agent:

• GET (Parameter) – Returns a Value

• SET (Parameter) – Sets a Value

The parameter that is passed to the agent is called an OID (object Identifier). This is a unique
reference to the information that is required. Every single piece of information that can be
returned from an SNMP agent will have its own unique OID. The complete set of OIDs is
organized in a hierarchical or tree structure to form a MIB (management information base).

There is a third command type called a Trap or Notification. Traps work differently to polling in
that they are not initiated by the SNMP Manager application. Traps are unsolicited messages
broadcast by the agent to its trap destination list (a list of IP addresses that represent the
SNMP Manager applications monitoring that agent). Traps are usually only generated when a
specific event occurs, usually alerts.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 192 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com SNMP

F.3 MIB Hierarchy


The MIB tree structure is shown below. Note the four SNMP groups available to the Manager.

MIB TREE

.iso.org.dod.internet.private.enterprises.snellWilcoxRoot

snellWilcoxProductReg

snellWilcoxStdsConvertorProducts

conversionAlchemistHD

alchemistHdNoteEntries alchemistHdCtrlEntries alchemistHdStatEntries alchemistHdConfEntries

...471.2… ...471.3…
...471.0… ...471.1…
2 = Status Parameter 3 = SNMP Configuration
0 = Notification 1 = Control Parameter
(read only) Parameters

F.4 Accessing a Control Value


To Get a value the SNMP manager looks up a value in the MIB file. In this example we are
going to configure the input of the Alchemist.

Textual OID name in the MIB:


.iso.org.dod.internet.private.enterprises.snellWilcoxRoot.snellWil
coxProductReg.snellWilcoxStdsConvertorProducts.conversionAlchemist
Hd.alchemistHdCtrlEntries.source

Numeric OID on the wire:


.1.3.6.1.4.1.7995.1.4.471.1.5030.0

In this example the command number is '5030'. This can be


found in the Rollcall Control Panel or Applet. To determine
the RollCall Command number, on the Display tab of the
RollCall Preferences window, ensure that the Show
Command Numbers option is selected. Then, hover the
cursor over the relevant control to reveal the command
number.

The final trailing ‘.0’ indicates an instance of this object. The agent responds with the value 0
(SDI A) or 1 (SDI B).

• With a Get command, the manager sends the parameter OID, and then receives back
the OID and its value.

• With a Set command the manager sends the OID plus the value and gets back the
OID plus the value.

Note that notification entries cannot be accessed via Get or Set.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 193 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com SNMP

F.5 SNMP Notification/Trap


The available notifications are listed within alchemistHdNoteEntries. In this example the
manager receives a notification relating to the input status.

Numeric OID on the wire:


.1.3.6.1.4.1.7995.1.4.471.0.6665

Textual OID name in the MIB:


.iso.org.dod.internet.private.enterprises.snellWilcoxRoot.snellWil
coxProductReg.snellWilcoxStdsConvertorProducts.conversionAlchemist
Hd.alchemistHdNoteEntries.input

In this case the notification packet actually contains the logInpLossStat parameter

Numeric OID on the wire:


.1.3.6.1.4.1.7995.1.4.471.2.5964

Textual OID name in the MIB:


.iso.org.dod.internet.private.enterprises.snellWilcoxRoot.snellWil
coxProductReg.snellWilcoxStdsConvertorProducts.conversionAlchemist
Hd.alchemistHdStatEntries. LogInpLossStat

As and when the input changes the trap receiver will indicate an input state of ‘lost’ or ‘ok’.

F.6 SNMP Community Values


In its simplest terms, a community can be considered as a password. SNMP Devices have
two types of community, Read and Write. Every SNMP Agent needs to be configured with
these values.

The community provides a very rudimentary level of security. If a GET request is received
from an SNMP Manager and the Read community value in the GET message matches the
read community value set in the agent, the agent will respond with the value requested.

An identical process is carried out when an agent receives a SET command, however the
Write community value must match in this instance.

By default most SNMP Agents have a read community value of ‘public’ and a write community
value of ‘private’.

In many systems these values are never changed, leaving the potential for unauthorized
access to a device.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 194 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com SNMP

F.7 SNMP Menu Hierarchy

System Setup

Comms

SNMP

Trap
Physical Interface Selection
(Tab 1 to 4)

Enable Read
Trap Enable
SNMP community

Resend All Write Trap IP


Traps Community Address

Trap UDP
UDP Port Contact
Port

Physical Trap
SNMP Name
Location Community

F.8 SNMP Control Interface


This section describes the control interface of the Alchemist Ph.C-HD’s SNMP Agent.

The SNMP Agent that operates within the Alchemist may be accessed via the
Communications menu.

Touch SNMP to access the SNMP configuration pages.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 195 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com SNMP

F.8.0.1 SNMP Page

On the main SNMP page, you can configure and enable up to four SNMP traps. Each SNMP
trap is configured on its own tab. For each trap, specify the following information:

Trap Enable Trap 1 destination.


Enable

Trap IP Configures the IP address to which traps (notifications) are sent. This
Address address should correspond to the IP address of the SNMP Manager.

Trap UDP Configures the destination UDP port for traps. The manager should be
Port configured to ‘listen’ for traps on this port. The SNMP default is 162 but
other port numbers may be used.

Trap Configures the trap community string.


Community

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 196 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com SNMP

F.8.0.2 SNMP > Physical

The settings on the SNMP > Physical page allow the Alchemist’s SNMP functions to be
enabled or disabled and the UDP Port to be used for SNMP communication to be specified.
This page also provides an option to resend all SNMP traps to the SNMP manager:

Enable This enables or disables the SNMP agent within the Alchemist.
SNMP
Default is disabled.

Resend All When pressed the Alchemist will resend all current traps/notifications.
Traps

UDP Port This indicates/configures the UDP port that the Alchemist listens on for
SNMP messages from a manager. The SNMP default is 161 but other
ports may be used.

Name Click edit to change unit’s physical name, used for SNMP purposes.
The default name is Alchemist PhC HD.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 197 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com SNMP

F.8.0.3 SNMP > Interface

The settings on the SNMP > Interface page configure the Alchemist’s SNMP interface.

Read Configures the SNMP read community value. Default is ‘public’.


Community

Write Configures the SNMP write community value. Default is ‘private’.


Community

Contact Configures the contact email address for Alchemist SNMP agent.
email

Physical Configures the physical location of the Alchemist


Location

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 198 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com SNMP

F.8.0.4 Where Can I Find the MIBs?

The MIBs are stored locally on the Alchemist or can be found on the Snell FTP site.

Simply connect the Alchemist to your network, open an internet browser (IE 7 recommended)
and enter the current IP address (see system > Ethernet > IP address).

This will show the Alchemist home page. At the top of the home screen select the ‘SNMP
MIBs’ logo to extract a zip file containing the required MIBs. Save these locally for use with
your chosen SNMP application.

F.8.0.5 Validated SNMP Applications

The Alchemist’s SNMP Agent has been explicitly validated with the following SNMP
applications:

• iReasoning (Pro & Enterprise versions)

• Castle Rock SNMPc Manager

• MGSoft

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 199 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Closed Caption CEA608/708

Appendix G. Closed Caption CEA608/708

G.1 Overview
Closed captioning is a term describing several systems developed to display text on a
television or video screen to provide additional or interpretive information to viewers who wish
to access it.

Closed captions typically display a transcription of the audio portion of a program as it occurs
(either verbatim or in edited form), sometimes including non-speech elements.

The term "closed" in closed captioning indicates that not all viewers see the captions, only
those who choose to decode or activate them. This distinguishes from "open captions"
(sometimes called "burned-in" or "hardcoded" captions), which are visible to all viewers.

Most of the world does not distinguish captions from subtitles however these terms do have
different meanings. “Subtitles” assume the viewer can hear but cannot understand the
language or accent, or speech is not entirely clear, so they only transcribe dialogue and some
on screen text. “Captions” aim to describe to the deaf and hard of hearing all significant audio
content. This includes spoken dialogue and non-speech information such as the identity of
the speakers and occasionally their manner of speaking together with music or sound effects
using words or symbols.

This Closed Caption CEA608/708 option provides the ability to transcode CEA608 captions
to/from CEA708 compatibility bytes (708 CB) and pass native CEA708 to CEA708 whilst
performing a standards conversion, cross conversion, up/down conversion.

G.1.1 Features
• Transcode CEA608 to/from CEA708 compatibility bytes

• Passing of native CEA708 to/from CEA708

• Seamless caption conversions in all conversion modes

• Supports CEA708 data and service information packets

• Automatic detection of input captions

• Caption data delayed/co-timed with video

• Easy to set up, intuitive GUI

• Independent configuration for Output A and Output B

G.1.2 What is CEA608?


CEA608 was developed in the 1970s for carrying 960bps captioning data and services in the
VBI (Vertical Blanking Interval) of NTSC video, an analogue composite video format. In latter
day digital component version of NTSC, this analogue waveform is digitally encoded and
embedded in Line 21 of the Video (Line 284 for Field 2).

G.1.3 What is CEA708?


CEA708 is a migration of the closed caption concepts used in CEA608 to the HDTV
environment. This Digital Television Closed Captioning (DTVCC) is allocated 9600bps and is
transported as a logical data channel in the DTV bit stream. This allows for the simultaneous
transmission of captions in multiple languages and caption windows can consist of text in a
variety of colours, size and other attributes.

SMPTE 334-1 outlines a means of transporting the 708 caption as a VANC packet (DID=61
SDID=01). The payload of this ancillary packet contains a Caption Distribution Packet (CDP)
and is outlined in SMPTE 334-2.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 200 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Closed Caption CEA608/708

The CDP payload can consist of CEA608 transported as compatibility bytes (transcoded
CEA608 / 708 CB), native CEA708 or both.

As DTV standards cover many different frame rates, the amount of caption data per
field/frame varies dependant on the transmission video standard. Lower frame rates such as
24/25Hz will carry twice the information as the higher frames rates such 50/59.94Hz. This is
to maintain the constant 9600bps.

G.2 CEA608/708 Control Interface


This section describes the control interface of the Alchemist Ph.C-HD’s Closed Caption
modes.

G.2.1 C-Captions Display Tab


The C-Captions (Closed Captions) display tab on the Home screen illustrates at a glance the
current 608/708 input status and output configuration.

Input The Input column displays the input caption status.

608 (21) Green (Present) indicates that a valid 608/708 signal is


608 (284) present.
708
Red (Missing) indicates the input 608/708 caption is
missing.

Grey (Not Valid) indicates that the 608 caption data is not
valid for the current input standard selected.

Red (Error) indicates that the input 708 caption is invalid.


Invalid conditions include a sequence count mis-match,
checksum error or some other error in the packet.

Output A/B The Output A/B column informs the user whether each output caption
(608/708) is currently being successfully passed (in the current mode of
608 (21) operation).
608 (284)
708 The caption is being successfully passed and is currently
inserted into the specified output line.

Note that 608 can only be inserted onto lines 21 and 284.

The caption is NOT currently being passed. The input


caption is missing and therefore cannot be inserted.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 201 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Closed Caption CEA608/708

Source The Source column indicates the source of each output caption type
(608/708).
608 (21)
608 (284) The specified 608 source caption is NOT present.

608 output caption is sourced from the 608 input.

608 output caption is sourced from 708 CB (compatibility


bytes).

708 708 output captions are sourced from both the 608 and
708 input. The compatibility bytes are sourced from the
608 and the Native 708 is source from the 708 input.

All 708 output captions (Native and compatibility bytes)


are sourced from the 708 input.

Edit Touch Edit to access the Closed Captions configuration page.

G.2.2 Closed Caption Menu Hierarchy

C-Captions Tab Output A Output B

C-Captions C-Captions
C-Captions Edit
Enable Enable

Line 21 Format Select


608 Source
Blanking Tab

525 625 720P 1080i 1080P

708 Output Line


708 Output Line 708 Output Line 708 Output Line 708 Output Line
708 Enable
708 Enable 708 Enable 708 Enable 708 Enable
608 (21) Enable
608 (284) Enable

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 202 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Closed Caption CEA608/708

G.2.3 Closed Caption Control


The Closed Caption control page offers configuration for CEA608 and CEA708 passing
functionality. In addition to these controls the Closed Captions must be enabled on the output
page before captions can be successfully passed.

525 Input This allows line 21/284 to be blanked once the 608 caption data has
Setup been extracted. This prevents the caption data creeping into the image
processing apertures.

Note: Only applicable to 525 59i inputs.

Line 21 Auto: If 608 is detected the Alchemist will extract the caption data and
Blanking then blank line 21/284.

On: Forces line 21/284 to be blanked even when a caption is not


present.

Off: Line 21/284 will never be blanked.

525 Input Use this to control of the source of the outgoing 608 captions.
Setup
Note: Only applicable to 525 59i inputs.

608 Source Auto: The Alchemist will automatically detect the presence of line 21 or
708 compatibility bytes. If both are both present Line 21 takes priority.

Line 21: Forces the 608 source to Line 21/284.

708 CB: Forces the 608 source to 708 CB.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 203 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Closed Caption CEA608/708

Format tabs Select the desired output format configuration using the tabs.

This allows the user to configure independently the five different output
formats (525, 625,720P, 1080i, 1080P).

Enable Touch Enable Line 21 to enable/disable the insertion of 525 608 Line
21 output captions.
Line 21
Note: Only present on 525 tab

Enable Touch Enable Line 284 to enable/disable the insertion of 525 608 Line
284 output captions.
Line 284
Note: Only present on 525 tab

Enable 708 Touch Enable Line 284 to enable/disable the insertion of 525 608 Line
284 output captions.

Note: Only present on 525 tab

Enable 708 Touch Enable 708 to enable/disable the insertion of 708 captions.

708 Line Touch the slider to select the 708 output insertion line number.

Alternatively touch the numeric value and a decimal keypad is available


to enter the desired line number.

G.2.4 Closed Captions Output Enabled/Disabled

C-Captions Closed Captions Output can be enabled/disabled independently for


Output output A and output B.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 204 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Closed Caption CEA608/708

G.3 Questions & Answers


Q1. Can VANC bypass packets, SMPTE 2016 packets and 708 packets be inserted on
the same output line?

A1. Yes. Priority is SMPTE 2016, VANC, 708.

Q2. Can 708 data be present in all standards?

A2. Yes it can, although it is more commonly used in HD standards.

Q3. Is it possible to extract 608 Line 21 caption data and then insert it on Line 284 at the
output?

A3. No. Line 21 captions will always be inserted on Line 21, 284 caption data will be inserted
on Line 284.

Q4. Can 525 contain both 608 (21/284) and 708?

A4. Yes it can, although 608 is more commonly used for 525.

Q5. What happens if only 708 CB or only native 708 are present at the input?

A5. When enabled the Alchemist will always output both 708 CB and native 708
headers/footers. If only one type is present, the other will be padded with null packets.

Q6. Why does the Alchemist report the output captions are “missing” when the
monitoring equipment claims captions are present at the output of the Alchemist?

A6. This can occur if the user has enabled the Alchemist’s output caption data whilst the
source data is “missing”. The Alchemist reports ”missing” as it is not successfully inserting the
specified input captions at the specified output. In this condition the Alchemist will however
output 608/708 packet containing null data, hence why the monitoring equipment advertises
the presence of a caption signal.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 205 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Latency Tables

Appendix H. Latency Tables

H.1 Overview
The delay for each of the Alchemist’s audio pairs can be configured individually. This delay is
added to the master audio delay and the unit’s internal processing delay. The values of this
delay vary according to the conversion being made and:

• Whether the FilmTools option is installed and enabled.

• If FilmTools is not installed or enabled, whether the Minimum Delay control in the
Setup menu is enabled.

H.2 Tables Explained


The three tables in this appendix show the latency through the unit as affected by these
factors.

• Column one displays the input standard.

• Column two displays the output standard.

• Column three displays the total system delay (in milliseconds) for the corresponding
conversion, assuming that the unit is referenced to the input and no offset has been
specified. This value is shown as the System Delay in the Status display on the Home
screen.

• Column four displays the minimum delay that may occur if the unit is running with an
offset or is in Freerun mode.

• Column five displays the maximum delay that may occur if the unit is running with an
offset or is in Freerun mode.

Table 1 displays the delay when the FilmTools option is not installed, or is disabled, and the
Minimum Delay control on the Setup menu is set to Yes. See page 207.

Table 2 displays the delay when the FilmTools option is enabled, or when the Minimum Delay
control on the Setup menu is set to No. See page 209.

Table 3 displays the delays when the FilmTools option is not installed, or disabled, and
Minimum Delay control is set to On. See page 214.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 206 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Latency Tables

Table 1: FilmTools not installed or disabled and Minimum Delay set to OFF

Delay (ms)
Min Delay (ms) Max Delay (ms)
Input Output Referenced to
Referenced with Referenced with
input with zero
offset or freerun offset or freerun
offset

1080 60i/30PsF 1080 60i/30PsF 250 217 250

1080 60i/30PsF 1080 59i/29PsF 250 217 250

1080 60i/30PsF 1080 50i/25PsF 248 248 248

1080 60i/30PsF 720/1080 60P 234 217 234

1080 60i/30PsF 720/1080 59P 250 217 250

1080 60i/30PsF 525 59i/29PsF 250 217 250

1080 60i/30PsF 625 50i/25PsF 235 235 235

1080 60i/30PsF 720/1080 50P 252 252 252

1080 59i/29PsF 1080 60i/30PsF 250 217 250

1080 59i/29PsF 1080 59i/29PsF 250 217 250

1080 59i/29PsF 1080 50i/25PsF 248 248 248

1080 59i/29PsF 720/1080 60P 250 217 250

1080 59i/29PsF 720/1080 59P 234 217 234

1080 59i/29PsF 525 59i/29PsF 250 217 250

1080 59i/29PsF 625 50i/25PsF 236 236 236

1080 59i/29PsF 720/1080 50P 252 252 252

1080 50i/25PsF 1080 60i/30PsF 281 281 281

1080 50i/25PsF 1080 59i/29PsF 281 281 281

1080 50i/25PsF 1080 50i/25PsF 300 260 300

1080 50i/25PsF 720/1080 60P 284 284 284

1080 50i/25PsF 720/1080 59P 284 284 284

1080 50i/25PsF 525 59i/29PsF 266 266 266

1080 50i/25PsF 625 50i/25PsF 300 260 300

1080 50i/25PsF 720/1080 50P 280 260 280

720/1080 60P 1080 60i/30PsF 234 217 234

720/1080 60P 1080 59i/29PsF 250 217 250

720/1080 60P 1080 50i/25PsF 248 248 248

720/1080 60P 720/1080 60P 234 217 234

720/1080 60P 720/1080 59P 250 217 250

720/1080 60P 525 59i/29PsF 250 217 250

720/1080 60P 625 50i/25PsF 235 235 235

720/1080 60P 720/1080 50P 252 252 252

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 207 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Latency Tables

Delay (ms)
Min Delay (ms) Max Delay (ms)
Input Output Referenced to
Referenced with Referenced with
input with zero
offset or freerun offset or freerun
offset

720/1080 59P 1080 60i/30PsF 250 217 250

720/1080 59P 1080 59i/29PsF 234 217 234

720/1080 59P 1080 50i/25PsF 248 248 248

720/1080 59P 720/1080 60P 250 217 250

720/1080 59P 720/1080 59P 234 217 234

720/1080 59P 525 59i/29PsF 234 217 234

720/1080 59P 625 50i/25PsF 236 236 236

720/1080 59P 720/1080 50P 252 252 252

525 59i/29PsF 1080 60i/30PsF 251 218 251

525 59i/29PsF 1080 59i/29PsF 251 218 251

525 59i/29PsF 1080 50i/25PsF 248 248 248

525 59i/29PsF 720/1080 60P 251 218 251

525 59i/29PsF 720/1080 59P 235 218 235

525 59i/29PsF 525 59i/29PsF 251 218 251

525 59i/29PsF 625 50i/25PsF 236 236 236

525 59i/29PsF 720/1080 50P 252 252 252

625 50i/25PsF 1080 60i/30PsF 281 281 281

625 50i/25PsF 1080 59i/29PsF 281 281 281

625 50i/25PsF 1080 50i/25PsF 301 261 301

625 50i/25PsF 720/1080 60P 284 284 284

625 50i/25PsF 720/1080 59P 284 284 284

625 50i/25PsF 525 59i/29PsF 266 266 266

625 50i/25PsF 625 50i/25PsF 301 261 301

625 50i/25PsF 720/1080 50P 281 261 281

720/1080 50P 1080 60i/30PsF 281 281 281

720/1080 50P 1080 59i/29PsF 281 281 281

720/1080 50P 1080 50i/25PsF 280 260 280

720/1080 50P 720/1080 60P 284 284 284

720/1080 50P 720/1080 59P 284 284 284

720/1080 50P 525 59i/29PsF 266 266 266

720/1080 50P 625 50i/25PsF 280 260 280

720/1080 50P 720/1080 50P 280 260 280

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 208 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Latency Tables

Table 2: FilmTools enabled or Minimum Delay set to OFF

Delay (ms)
Min Delay (ms) Max Delay (ms)
Input Output Referenced to
Referenced with Referenced with
input with zero
offset or freerun offset or freerun
offset

1080 60i/30PsF 1080 60i/30PsF 234 217 250

1080 60i/30PsF 1080 59i/29PsF 234 217 250

1080 60i/30PsF 1080 50i/25PsF 265 248 281

1080 60i/30PsF 720/1080 60P 234 217 250

1080 60i/30PsF 720/1080 59P 234 217 250

1080 60i/30PsF 525 59i/29PsF 234 217 250

1080 60i/30PsF 625 50i/25PsF 252 235 268

1080 60i/30PsF 1080 48i/24PsF 268 251 284

1080 60i/30PsF 1080 47i/23PsF 268 251 284

1080 60i/30PsF 625 48i/24PsF 255 238 271

1080 60i/30PsF 625 47i/23PsF 255 238 271

1080 60i/30PsF 720/1080 50P 269 252 285

1080 59i/29PsF 1080 60i/30PsF 234 217 250

1080 59i/29PsF 1080 59i/29PsF 234 217 250

1080 59i/29PsF 1080 50i/25PsF 265 248 281

1080 59i/29PsF 720/1080 60P 234 217 250

1080 59i/29PsF 720/1080 59P 234 217 250

1080 59i/29PsF 525 59i/29PsF 234 217 250

1080 59i/29PsF 625 50i/25PsF 253 236 269

1080 59i/29PsF 1080 48i/24PsF 268 251 284

1080 59i/29PsF 1080 47i/23PsF 268 251 284

1080 59i/29PsF 625 48i/24PsF 255 238 271

1080 59i/29PsF 625 47i/23PsF 255 238 271

1080 59i/29PsF 720/1080 50P 269 252 285

1080 50i/25PsF 1080 60i/30PsF 299 281 318

1080 50i/25PsF 1080 59i/29PsF 299 281 318

1080 50i/25PsF 1080 50i/25PsF 280 260 300

1080 50i/25PsF 720/1080 60P 302 284 321

1080 50i/25PsF 720/1080 59P 302 284 321

1080 50i/25PsF 525 59i/29PsF 284 266 303

1080 50i/25PsF 625 50i/25PsF 280 260 300

1080 50i/25PsF 1080 48i/24PsF 307 287 327

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 209 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Latency Tables

Delay (ms)
Min Delay (ms) Max Delay (ms)
Input Output Referenced to
Referenced with Referenced with
input with zero
offset or freerun offset or freerun
offset

1080 50i/25PsF 1080 47i/23PsF 307 287 327

1080 50i/25PsF 625 48i/24PsF 294 274 314

1080 50i/25PsF 625 47i/23PsF 294 274 314

1080 50i/25PsF 720/1080 50P 280 260 300

720/1080 60P 1080 60i/30PsF 234 217 250

720/1080 60P 1080 59i/29PsF 234 217 250

720/1080 60P 1080 50i/25PsF 265 248 281

720/1080 60P 720/1080 60P 234 217 250

720/1080 60P 720/1080 59P 234 217 250

720/1080 60P 525 59i/29PsF 234 217 250

720/1080 60P 625 50i/25PsF 252 235 268

720/1080 60P 1080 48i/24PsF 268 251 284

720/1080 60P 1080 47i/23PsF 268 251 284

720/1080 60P 625 48i/24PsF 254 237 270

720/1080 60P 625 47i/23PsF 255 238 271

720/1080 60P 720/1080 50P 269 252 285

720/1080 59P 1080 60i/30PsF 234 217 250

720/1080 59P 1080 59i/29PsF 234 217 250

720/1080 59P 1080 50i/25PsF 265 248 281

720/1080 59P 720/1080 60P 234 217 250

720/1080 59P 720/1080 59P 234 217 250

720/1080 59P 525 59i/29PsF 234 217 250

720/1080 59P 625 50i/25PsF 253 236 269

720/1080 59P 1080 48i/24PsF 268 251 284

720/1080 59P 1080 47i/23PsF 268 251 284

720/1080 59P 625 48i/24PsF 255 238 271

720/1080 59P 625 47i/23PsF 255 238 271

720/1080 59P 720/1080 50P 269 252 285

525 59i/29PsF 1080 60i/30PsF 235 218 251

525 59i/29PsF 1080 59i/29PsF 235 218 251

525 59i/29PsF 1080 50i/25PsF 265 248 281

525 59i/29PsF 720/1080 60P 235 218 251

525 59i/29PsF 720/1080 59P 235 218 251

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 210 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Latency Tables

Delay (ms)
Min Delay (ms) Max Delay (ms)
Input Output Referenced to
Referenced with Referenced with
input with zero
offset or freerun offset or freerun
offset

525 59i/29PsF 525 59i/29PsF 235 218 251

525 59i/29PsF 625 50i/25PsF 253 236 269

525 59i/29PsF 1080 48i/24PsF 268 251 284

525 59i/29PsF 1080 47i/23PsF 268 251 284

525 59i/29PsF 625 48i/24PsF 255 238 271

525 59i/29PsF 625 47i/23PsF 255 238 271

525 59i/29PsF 720/1080 50P 269 252 285

625 50i/25PsF 1080 60i/30PsF 299 281 318

625 50i/25PsF 1080 59i/29PsF 299 281 318

625 50i/25PsF 1080 50i/25PsF 281 261 301

625 50i/25PsF 720/1080 60P 302 284 321

625 50i/25PsF 720/1080 59P 302 284 321

625 50i/25PsF 525 59i/29PsF 284 266 303

625 50i/25PsF 625 50i/25PsF 281 261 301

625 50i/25PsF 1080 48i/24PsF 308 288 328

625 50i/25PsF 1080 47i/23PsF 308 288 328

625 50i/25PsF 625 48i/24PsF 295 275 315

625 50i/25PsF 625 47i/23PsF 295 275 315

625 50i/25PsF 720/1080 50P 281 261 301

1080 48i/24PsF 1080 60i/30PsF 310 291 329

1080 48i/24PsF 1080 59i/29PsF 310 291 329

1080 48i/24PsF 1080 50i/25PsF 316 296 337

1080 48i/24PsF 720/1080 60P 314 295 333

1080 48i/24PsF 720/1080 59P 314 295 333

1080 48i/24PsF 525 59i/29PsF 296 277 315

1080 48i/24PsF 625 50i/25PsF 303 283 324

1080 48i/24PsF 1080 48i/24PsF 292 271 313

1080 48i/24PsF 1080 47i/23PsF 292 271 313

1080 48i/24PsF 625 48i/24PsF 292 271 313

1080 48i/24PsF 625 47i/23PsF 292 271 313

1080 48i/24PsF 720/1080 50P 319 299 340

1080 47i/23PsF 1080 60i/30PsF 311 292 330

1080 47i/23PsF 1080 59i/29PsF 311 292 330

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 211 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Latency Tables

Delay (ms)
Min Delay (ms) Max Delay (ms)
Input Output Referenced to
Referenced with Referenced with
input with zero
offset or freerun offset or freerun
offset

1080 47i/23PsF 1080 50i/25PsF 316 296 337

1080 47i/23PsF 720/1080 60P 314 295 333

1080 47i/23PsF 720/1080 59P 314 295 333

1080 47i/23PsF 525 59i/29PsF 296 277 315

1080 47i/23PsF 625 50i/25PsF 303 283 324

1080 47i/23PsF 1080 48i/24PsF 292 271 313

1080 47i/23PsF 1080 47i/23PsF 292 271 313

1080 47i/23PsF 625 48i/24PsF 292 271 313

1080 47i/23PsF 625 47i/23PsF 292 271 313

1080 47i/23PsF 720/1080 50P 320 300 341

625 48i/24PsF 1080 60i/30PsF 311 292 330

625 48i/24PsF 1080 59i/29PsF 311 292 330

625 48i/24PsF 1080 50i/25PsF 316 296 337

625 48i/24PsF 720/1080 60P 314 295 333

625 48i/24PsF 720/1080 59P 314 295 333

625 48i/24PsF 525 59i/29PsF 296 277 315

625 48i/24PsF 625 50i/25PsF 303 283 324

625 48i/24PsF 1080 48i/24PsF 293 272 314

625 48i/24PsF 1080 47i/23PsF 293 272 314

625 48i/24PsF 625 48i/24PsF 293 272 314

625 48i/24PsF 625 47i/23PsF 293 272 314

625 48i/24PsF 720/1080 50P 320 300 341

625 47i/23PsF 1080 60i/30PsF 311 292 330

625 47i/23PsF 1080 59i/29PsF 311 292 330

625 47i/23PsF 1080 50i/25PsF 316 296 337

625 47i/23PsF 720/1080 60P 314 295 333

625 47i/23PsF 720/1080 59P 314 295 333

625 47i/23PsF 525 59i/29PsF 296 277 315

625 47i/23PsF 625 50i/25PsF 304 284 325

625 47i/23PsF 1080 48i/24PsF 293 272 314

625 47i/23PsF 1080 47i/23PsF 293 272 314

625 47i/23PsF 625 48i/24PsF 293 272 314

625 47i/23PsF 625 47i/23PsF 293 272 314

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 212 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Latency Tables

Delay (ms)
Min Delay (ms) Max Delay (ms)
Input Output Referenced to
Referenced with Referenced with
input with zero
offset or freerun offset or freerun
offset

625 47i/23PsF 720/1080 50P 320 300 341

720/1080 50P 1080 60i/30PsF 299 281 318

720/1080 50P 1080 59i/29PsF 299 281 318

720/1080 50P 1080 50i/25PsF 280 260 300

720/1080 50P 720/1080 60P 302 284 321

720/1080 50P 720/1080 59P 302 284 321

720/1080 50P 525 59i/29PsF 284 266 303

720/1080 50P 625 50i/25PsF 280 260 300

720/1080 50P 1080 48i/24PsF 307 287 327

720/1080 50P 1080 47i/23PsF 307 287 327

720/1080 50P 625 48i/24PsF 294 274 314

720/1080 50P 625 47i/23PsF 294 274 314

720/1080 50P 720/1080 50P 280 260 300

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 213 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Latency Tables

Table 3: FilmTools not installed or disabled and Minimum Delay set to On

Delay (ms)
Min Delay (ms) Max Delay (ms)
Input Output Referenced to
Referenced with Referenced with
input with zero
offset or freerun offset or freerun
offset

1080 60i/30PsF 1080 60i/30PsF 167 134 167

1080 60i/30PsF 1080 59i/29PsF 167 134 167

1080 60i/30PsF 1080 50i/25PsF 165 165 165

1080 60i/30PsF 720/1080 60P 151 134 151

1080 60i/30PsF 720/1080 59P 167 134 167

1080 60i/30PsF 525 59i/29PsF 167 134 167

1080 60i/30PsF 625 50i/25PsF 152 152 152

1080 60i/30PsF 720/1080 50P 169 169 169

1080 59i/29PsF 1080 60i/30PsF 167 134 167

1080 59i/29PsF 1080 59i/29PsF 167 134 167

1080 59i/29PsF 1080 50i/25PsF 165 165 165

1080 59i/29PsF 720/1080 60P 167 134 167

1080 59i/29PsF 720/1080 59P 151 134 151

1080 59i/29PsF 525 59i/29PsF 167 134 167

1080 59i/29PsF 625 50i/25PsF 152 152 152

1080 59i/29PsF 720/1080 50P 169 169 169

1080 50i/25PsF 1080 60i/30PsF 181 181 181

1080 50i/25PsF 1080 59i/29PsF 181 181 181

1080 50i/25PsF 1080 50i/25PsF 200 160 200

1080 50i/25PsF 720/1080 60P 184 184 184

1080 50i/25PsF 720/1080 59P 184 184 184

1080 50i/25PsF 525 59i/29PsF 166 166 166

1080 50i/25PsF 625 50i/25PsF 200 160 200

1080 50i/25PsF 720/1080 50P 180 160 180

720/1080 60P 1080 60i/30PsF 151 134 151

720/1080 60P 1080 59i/29PsF 167 134 167

720/1080 60P 1080 50i/25PsF 165 165 165

720/1080 60P 720/1080 60P 151 134 151

720/1080 60P 720/1080 59P 167 134 167

720/1080 60P 525 59i/29PsF 167 134 167

720/1080 60P 625 50i/25PsF 152 152 152

720/1080 60P 720/1080 50P 168 168 168

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 214 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Latency Tables

Delay (ms)
Min Delay (ms) Max Delay (ms)
Input Output Referenced to
Referenced with Referenced with
input with zero
offset or freerun offset or freerun
offset

720/1080 59P 1080 60i/30PsF 167 134 167

720/1080 59P 1080 59i/29PsF 151 134 151

720/1080 59P 1080 50i/25PsF 165 165 165

720/1080 59P 720/1080 60P 167 134 167

720/1080 59P 720/1080 59P 151 134 151

720/1080 59P 525 59i/29PsF 151 134 151

720/1080 59P 625 50i/25PsF 152 152 152

720/1080 59P 720/1080 50P 169 169 169

525 59i/29PsF 1080 60i/30PsF 167 134 167

525 59i/29PsF 1080 59i/29PsF 167 134 167

525 59i/29PsF 1080 50i/25PsF 165 165 165

525 59i/29PsF 720/1080 60P 167 134 167

525 59i/29PsF 720/1080 59P 151 134 151

525 59i/29PsF 525 59i/29PsF 167 134 167

525 59i/29PsF 625 50i/25PsF 153 153 153

525 59i/29PsF 720/1080 50P 169 169 169

625 50i/25PsF 1080 60i/30PsF 181 181 181

625 50i/25PsF 1080 59i/29PsF 181 181 181

625 50i/25PsF 1080 50i/25PsF 201 161 201

625 50i/25PsF 720/1080 60P 184 184 184

625 50i/25PsF 720/1080 59P 184 184 184

625 50i/25PsF 525 59i/29PsF 166 166 166

625 50i/25PsF 625 50i/25PsF 201 161 201

625 50i/25PsF 720/1080 50P 181 161 181

720/1080 50P 1080 60i/30PsF 181 181 181

720/1080 50P 1080 59i/29PsF 181 181 181

720/1080 50P 1080 50i/25PsF 180 160 180

720/1080 50P 720/1080 60P 184 184 184

720/1080 50P 720/1080 59P 184 184 184

720/1080 50P 525 59i/29PsF 166 166 166

720/1080 50P 625 50i/25PsF 180 160 180

720/1080 50P 720/1080 50P 180 160 180

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 215 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com RollTrack Audio Delay Tracking

Appendix I. RollTrack Audio Delay Tracking


RollTrack is a feature of RollCall™ (Snell’s proprietary remote control system), that allows
devices to communicate across the RollCall network with no direct user intervention.

RollTrack Audio Delay Tracking enables RollCall-compatible audio delay products to track
delay introduced by RollCall compatible video processing products.

The simplest configuration is a single video unit and a single audio delay in a RollCall system.
The audio delay will have the same delay as through the video path. If the delay changes the
audio delay will track.

IQD1FSY delayed video by 10 ms


4:2:2

RollCall connection

delayed audio by 10 ms
Analogue
IQBADC
Audio
The next level of configuration is where there are multiple Frame Synchronizers (for example)
each connected through RollCall to their own tracking Audio Delay. (It is worth stating that the
synchronizers and audio delays do not have to be in the same enclosure; the addressing
scheme, discussed later, allows for the units to be positioned anywhere in the RollCall
domain.)

The maximum number of video units and audio delays in a RollCall system is set by the
maximum limit of the number of modules in a RollCall network and is currently 3840 on a
single network without bridges.

The unique identification of the destination unit (a decimal number) for various modules is as
follows:

Module ID

IQBADC 52

IQBDAC 52

IQBAAD 53

IQBDAD 54

IQBSYN 89

IQBADCD 107

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 216 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com RollTrack Audio Delay Tracking

The next level of complexity is a vertical delay cluster where a video unit can have up to eight
audio delays tracking - of the same or different types.

IQD1FSY delayed video by 10 ms


4:2:2 changes to 20 ms

RollCall network connection

delayed audio by 10 ms
Analogue
IQBADC tracks to 20 ms
Audio

IQBAAD delayed audio by 10 ms


Analogue tracks to 20 ms
Audio

From one to eight audio delay products can be connected via RollCall to a single frame
synchronizer, for example. If the synchronizer delay changes, then however many audio
delays are connected will track the delay. The audio delays can also have a manual delay
which will be added to the RollTrack delay.

The next level of complexity is a horizontal delay cluster where an audio delay can track up to
four video units.

IQDMSDA IQD1FSY IQD1FSY IQD1FSY


Δ1 Δ2 Δ3 Δ4

RollCall network connection

IQBADC
Δ m (= manual delay set
in the BADC)

Total delay:
ΔΤ = ∑ Δ1−4 + Δm
The total delay time through the audio delay is then the sum of the individual delays
introduced by the video units plus the manual delay of the audio unit. The manual delay can
be set to compensate for any fixed propagation delay in the video path or may be set to zero.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 217 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com RollTrack Audio Delay Tracking

The next level of complexity is a matrix delay cluster where each audio delay (up to eight) can
track up to four video units. This configuration is in effect a four by eight matrix of video units
and audio delay units. The total delay time through the audio delay units is then the sum of
the individual delays introduced by the video units plus the manual delay of the audio unit.

IQDMSDA IQD1FSY IQD1FSY IQD1FSY


Δ1 Δ2 Δ3 Δ4

RollCall network
i

IQBDAD 1
ΔΤ = ∑ Δ1−4 + Δm

IQBDAD 8
ΔΤ = ∑ Δ1−4 + Δm
As any of the delay times change in the video path so will the audio delay time track this
delay.

A virtual connection is made between from, for example, an IQD1FSY to an IQBDAD by:

• selecting the Setup... Menu of the IQD1FSY

• then selecting the Audio_Delay... Menu

• then choosing from Unit_1 to Unit_8

• then entering the unique network address of the IQBDAD in the form nnnn:xx:yy*z*d

• where nnnn = network address and in most cases will be 0000(hex)

• xx = IQ enclosure address (hex)

• yy = slot address of the IQBDAD (hex)

• z = the connection (or channel) number (decimal) - see table below.

d = the unique identification of the destination unit (decimal) The ID entered must
match the receiving units own ID or else the command will be ignored. If the ID value
is set to 00, the receiving unit does not perform an ID match and will always accept
the incoming command then selecting the Delay... Menu of the IQBDAD then select-
ing RollTrack.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 218 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com RollTrack Audio Delay Tracking

Example of Network Addresses with Channel Numbers and ID Numbers:

D1FSY 1 D1FSY 2 D1FSY 3 D1FSY 4

Audio delay 1 0000:10:01*14*54 0000:10:01*15*54 0000:10:01*16*54 0000:10:01*17*54

Audio delay 2 0000:10:03*14*54 0000:10:03*15*54 0000:10:03*16*54 0000:10:03*17*54

Audio delay 3 0000:10:05*14*54 0000:10:05*15*54 0000:10:05*16*54 0000:10:05*17*54

Audio delay 4 0000:10:07*14*54 0000:10:07*15*54 0000:10:07*16*54 0000:10:07*17*54

Audio delay 5 0000:10:09*14*54 0000:10:09*15*54 0000:10:09*16*54 0000:10:09*17*54

Audio delay 6 0000:10:0B*14*54 0000:10:0B*15*54 0000:10:0B*16*54 0000:10:0B*17*54

Audio delay 7 0000:10:0D*14*54 0000:10:0D*15*54 0000:10:0D*16*54 0000:10:0D*17*54

Audio delay 8 0000:10:0F*14*54 0000:10:0F*15*54 0000:10:0F*16*54 0000:10:0F*17*54

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 219 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com RollTrack Audio Delay Tracking

The most complex system would be an array of matrix delay clusters.

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 220 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com RollTrack Audio Delay Tracking

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 221 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Product Support Procedure

Appendix J. Product Support Procedure


If you experience any technical or operational difficulties with a Snell product, please do not
hesitate to contact us or utilize our online form to request assistance. There is a lot of
information you can give us that will enable us to diagnose your problem swiftly. Please read
the following guidelines, as these suggestions will help us to help you.

J.1 Basic Information


For Units

Please provide the exact product Model, unit Serial Number and Software Version
information.

For Cards or Modules

Please provide the Sub-Assembly Number, card Serial Number and the Software Version
information.

J.2 Basic Application


Inputs

Please provide full details of the Input Signals being used including any references etc. and
where they are being generated.

Outputs

Please provide full details of the Output Signals required and how they are being monitored.

System

Please provide a brief description of the system in which your Snell equipment is currently
being used.

J.3 Basic Tests


Preset Unit

Please use the Preset Unit function to return the settings back to the factory default.

RollCall

Is your unit currently connected to a RollCall capable PC? This software is obtainable free of
charge and provides a very user friendly GUI for virtually all Snell equipment - perfect for
complex products, large systems or those with passive front panels.

Card Edge Info.

What is the status of the card edge LEDs or display? These can often provide information
such as power status and input detection conditions.

Internal TPG

Many Snell products have an internal test pattern/tone generator. Please activate this to
assist you with your problem analysis.

In addition, please do not forget to provide us with contact information, including names,
telephone & fax numbers, e-mail addresses, and business address. A form is provided for this
information on the next page. Alternatively, an online form is available on the Snell Web site
at: http://www.snellgroup.com

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 222 © 2011 Snell Limited


Alchemist Ph.C-HD www.snellgroup.com Product Support Procedure

J.4 Product Support Request Form


* Indicates required information.

Name:*

Company:*

Address:*

Postal/Zip Code:

Country:*

Telephone:*

Fax:

Email*

Local Snell Center:*

Product Name:*

Product Type:*

Unit Serial Number:*

Fault/Spare Part
Information:*
(please advise us how many
units show this fault and the
system layout showing all other
manufacturers' products)

Preferred Method of
Contact:*

Please mail to: Service contact information:


Snell Ltd. +44 (0) 118 921 4214 (tel)
Southleigh Park House +44 (0) 118 921 4268 fax)
Eastleigh Road Web: http://www.snellgroup.com/support
Havant
Hants
PO9 2PE
United Kingdom

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 223 © 2011 Snell Limited

You might also like